Larger versions of most illustrations may be seen by right-clicking them
and selecting an option to view them separately, or by double-tapping and/or
stretching them.
The cover of this eBook was the original Title page.
“A Map of the World that does not include Utopia is not worth even glancing at....”
GEORGE G. HARRAP & CO. LTD.
LONDON CALCUTTA SYDNEY
Published 1923 byGeorge G. Harrap & Co. Ltd. 39–41 Parker Street, Kingsway, London, W.C.2
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The first outline of this book dates back ten years; and
since then I have woven it and rewoven it in my mind. The
actual work of composition was started by a suggestion
from Mr. Van Wyck Brooks; and without Mr. Brooks’
encouragement I should perhaps never have begun or
carried through the task. The general background of ideas
has been heavily colored by my contacts with Professor
Patrick Geddes, through his books and by correspondence;
and I owe a debt to him I have not always been able to
acknowledge in direct reference or in quotation marks. I
take the opportunity here to express the hearty gratitude
which might otherwise have been conveyed in the more
archaic form of a dedication.
In the revision of the MS. I have been blessed with the
generous advice and criticism of a number of friends; in
particular, Mr. Clarence Britten, Mr. Herbert Feis, Mr.
Geroid Robinson, and Miss Sophia Wittenberg, each of
whom performed a unique service. To Messrs. Victor
Branford and Alexander Farquharson of the Sociological
Society of Great Britain I am indebted for many
pertinent suggestions. My thanks are also due to the
editors of The Freeman for permission to use extracts from
two articles: Towards a Humanist Synthesis and Beauty
and the Picturesque. Finally, Mr. Hendrik van Loon’s
friendly interest calls for a departing beam of gratitude.
Lewis Mumford.
New York City.
CONTENTS
Introduction by Hendrik Willem van Loon, Ph.D.
CHAPTER ONE
How the will-to-utopia causes men to live in two worlds, and how, therefore, we re-read the Story of Utopia—the other half of the Story of Mankind.
How the Greeks lived in a New World, and utopia seemed just round the corner. How Plato in the Republic is chiefly concerned with what will hold the ideal city together.
How something happened in the eighteenth century which made men “furiously to think,” and how a whole group of utopias sprang out of the upturned soil of industrialism.
How some utopians have thought that a good community rested at bottom on the right division and use of land; and what sort of communities these land-animals projected.
How Étienne Cabet dreamed of a new Napoleon called Icar, and a new France called Icaria; and how his utopia, with that which Edward Bellamy shows us in Looking Backward, gives us a hint of what machinery might bring us to if the industrial organization were nationalized.
How William Morris and W. H. Hudson renew the classic tradition of utopias; and how, finally, Mr. H. G. Wells sums up and clarifies the utopias of the past, and brings them into contact with the world of the present.
It is a sunny day and I am sitting on the top of a mountain.
Until this morning, it had been the mountain of a fairy story
that was twenty centuries old.
Now, it is a mighty hill and I can feel its warm coat of white
reindeer-moss, and if I were willing to stretch out my hand, I
could pluck the red berries that are in full bloom.
A hundred years from now it will be gone.
For it is really a large chunk of pure iron, dumped by a
playful Providence in the very heart of Lapland.
Do you remember an old tale of Norse mythology? How
somewhere, far in the north, there stood a high peak of iron,
which was a hundred miles high and a hundred miles wide?
And how a little bird came to it once every thousand years to
sharpen its beak? And how, when the mountain was gone, a
single second of all eternity would have passed by?
I heard it told as a child.
I remembered it always, and I told it to my own boys when
they began to learn history. It seemed the invention of some
prehistoric Hans Christian Andersen. It belonged to the imaginary
scenery of our dreams.
The story has come true, and I have found my old mountain
where I least expected it.
To make the cycle of coincidence perfect, this hill was named
after a bird. The Lapp, with a fine sense of sound, called the
ptarmigan “Kiru.” Kirunavaara no longer hears the shrill
“kiru-kiru” of rising birds. Twice a day it listens to the
terrific detonation of half a hundred charges of dynamite.
Then it is shaken by the little trains which carry the rock to
the valley.
In the evening, it sees the lights of the large electric engines
which hoist the valuable metal across the arctic wilderness of
Lake Tornotrask.
Two months later, the ore has been melted and worked into
those modern articles of trade which go by the name of bridges
and automobiles and ships and apartment houses and a thousand
other things which once promised to elevate man from the
ranks of the beasts of burden.
What has become of that promise, the survivors of the last
eight years know with great if gruesome accuracy.
Even the humble Lapp has heard of the great upheaval, and
has asked why the white people should kill each other when the
whole world was full of reindeer and when God has given us
the hills and the plains so that forever there should be food
enough for the long days of summer and the longer nights of
the endless winter.
But the ways of the Lapp are not the ways of the white man.
These simple followers of a pure and much undiluted nature
follow the even tenor of their ways as their ancestors did, five
and ten thousand years ago.
We, on the other hand, have our engines and we have our
railroad trains and we have our factories and we cannot get rid
of these iron servants without destroying the very basis of our
civilization. We may hate these ungainly companions, but we
need them. In time to come, we shall know how to be their
masters. Then Plato shall give us a revised Republic where all
the houses are heated by steam and where all the dishes are
washed by electricity.
We are not suffering from too much machinery, but from too
little. For let there be enough iron servants and more of us
shall be able to sit on the tops of mountains and stare into the
blue sky and waste valuable hours, imagining the things that
ought to be.
The Old Testament used to call such people prophets. They
raised strange cities of their hearts’ delight, which should be
based exclusively upon righteousness and piety. But the greatest
of all their prophets the Jews killed to make a Roman holiday.
The Greeks knew such wise men as philosophers. They allowed
them great freedom and rejoiced in the mathematical precision
with which their intellectual leaders mapped out those theoretical
roads which were to lead mankind from chaos to an ordered state
of society.
The Middle Ages insisted with narrow persistence upon the
Kingdom of Heaven as the only possible standard for a decent
Christian Utopia.
They crushed all those who dared to question the positive existence
of such a future state of glory and content. They built it of
stone and precious metals, but neglected the spiritual fundament.
And so it perished.
The sixteenth and seventeenth centuries fought many bitter wars
to decide the exact nature of a whitewashed Paradise, erected
upon the crumbling ruins of the mediæval church.
The eighteenth century saw the Promised Land lying just across
the terrible bulwark of stupidity and superstition, which a thousand
years of clerical selfishness had erected for its own protection
and safety.
There followed a mighty battle to crush the infamy of ignorance
and bring about an era of well-balanced reason.
Unfortunately, a few enthusiasts carried the matter a trifle too
far.
Napoleon, realist-in-chief of all time, brought the world back to
the common ground of solid facts.
Our own generation drew the logical conclusion of the Napoleonic
premises.
Behold the map of Europe and see how well we have wrought.
For alas! this world needs Utopias as it needs fairy stories. It
does not matter so much where we are going, as long as we are
making consciously for some definite goal. And a Utopia, however
strange or fanciful, is the only possible beacon upon the uncharted
seas of the distant future.
It encourages us in our efforts. Sometimes the light is hidden by
the clouds and for a moment we may lose our way. Then the
faint light once more breaks through the darkness and we press
forward with new courage.
And when life is dull and meaningless (the main curse of all
existence) we find consolation in the fact that a hundred years
from now, our children shall reach the shore for which we were
bound when we ourselves left the bridge and were lowered to the
peaceful bottom of the ocean.
And now the sun has gone down and a chill wind blows from
Kebnekajse, where the wild geese of little Nils Holgerson live
amidst the endless silence of the eternal snow. Soon the top shall
be hidden in the mist and I shall have to find my way back by
the noise of the steam shovels, plying their elephantine trade at
the foot of the first terrace.
The mountain of my fairy story once more will be the profitable
investment of a Company of Iron-mongers.
But that does not matter.
Lewis Mumford, for whom I am writing this, will understand
what I mean.
And I shall be content.
Hendrik Willem van Loon
Kiruna, Lapland, 14 Sept., 1922.
CHAPTER ONE
How the will-to-utopia causes men to live in two
worlds, and how, therefore, we re-read the Story of
Utopias—the other half of the Story of Mankind.
THE STORY OF UTOPIAS — CHAPTER ONE — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6
Utopia has long been another name for the unreal
and the impossible. We have set utopia over against
the world. As a matter of fact, it is our utopias that
make the world tolerable to us: the cities and mansions
that people dream of are those in which they finally
live. The more that men react upon their environment
and make it over after a human pattern, the more continuously
do they live in utopia; but when there is a
breach between the world of affairs and the overworld
of utopia, we become conscious of the part that the
will-to-utopia has played in our lives, and we see our
utopia as a separate reality.
It is the separate reality of utopia that we are
going to explore in the course of this book—Utopia
as a world by itself, divided into ideal commonwealths,
with all its communities clustered into proud cities,
aiming bravely at the good life.
This discussion of ideal commonwealths gets its form
and its color from the time in which it is written.
Plato’s Republic dates from the period of social disintegration
which followed the Peloponnesian War;
and some of its mordant courage is probably derived
from the hopelessness of conditions that came under
Plato’s eye. It was in the midst of a similar period of
disorder and violence that Sir Thomas More laid the
foundations for his imaginary commonwealth: Utopia
was the bridge by which he sought to span the gap between
the old order of the Middle Age, and the new
interests and institutions of the Renascence.
In presenting this history and criticism of utopias we
are perhaps being pulled by the same interests that led
Plato and More onwards, for it is only after the storm
that we dare to look for the rainbow. Our fall into a
chasm of disillusion has stimulated us to discuss in
a more thorough way the ultimate goods, the basic
aims, the whole conception of the “good life” by which,
in modern times, we have been guided. In the midst of
the tepid and half-hearted discussions that continue
to arise out of prohibition laws and strikes and “peace”
conferences let us break in with the injunction to talk
about fundamentals—consider Utopia!
Man walks with his feet on the ground and his head
in the air; and the history of what has happened on
earth—the history of cities and armies and of all the
things that have had body and form—is only one-half
the Story of Mankind.
In every age, the external scenery in which the human
drama has been framed has remained pretty much the
same. There have been fluctuations in climate and
changes in terrain; and at times a great civilization,
like that of the Mayas in Central America, has arisen
where now only a thick net of jungle remains; but the
hills around Jerusalem are the hills that David saw;
and during the historic period the drowning of a city
in the Netherlands or the rise of a shifting bank of
real estate along the coast of New Jersey is little more
than the wearing off of the paint or a crack in the
plaster. What we call the material world constantly
changes, it goes without saying: mountains are stript
of trees and become wastes, deserts are plowed with
water and become gardens. The main outlines, however,
hold their own remarkably well; and we could
have travelled better in Roman days with a modern
map than with the best chart Ptolemy could have
offered us.
If the world in which men live were the world as it
is known to the physical geographer, we should have
a pretty simple time of it. We might follow Whitman’s
advice, and live as the animals, and stop whining for
all time about our sins and imperfections.
What makes human history such an uncertain and
fascinating story is that man lives in two worlds—the
world within and the world without—and the world
within men’s heads has undergone transformations
which have disintegrated material things with the power
and rapidity of radium. I shall take the liberty of calling
this inner world our idolum (ido′lum) or world
of ideas. The word “ideas” is not used here precisely
in the ordinary sense. I use it rather to stand for
what the philosophers would call the subjective world,
what the theologians would perhaps call the spiritual
world; and I mean to include in it all the philosophies,
fantasies, rationalizations, projections, images, and
opinions in terms of which people pattern their behavior.
This world of ideas, in the case of scientific
truths, for example, sometimes has a rough correspondence
with what people call the world; but it is important
to note that it has contours of its own which are quite
independent of the material environment.
Now the physical world is a definite, inescapable
thing. Its limits are narrow and obvious. On occasion,
if your impulse is sufficiently strong, you can
leave the land for the sea, or go from a warm climate
into a cool one; but you cannot cut yourself off from
the physical environment without terminating your
life. For good or ill, you must breathe air, eat food,
drink water; and the penalties for refusing to meet
these conditions are inexorable. Only a lunatic would
refuse to recognize this physical environment; it is
the substratum of our daily lives.
But if the physical environment is the earth, the
world of ideas corresponds to the heavens. We sleep
under the light of stars that have long since ceased
to exist, and we pattern our behavior by ideas which
have no reality as soon as we cease to credit them.
Whilst it holds together this world of ideas—this
idolum—is almost as sound, almost as real, almost as
inescapable as the bricks of our houses or the asphalt
beneath our feet. The “belief” that the world was
flat was once upon a time more important than the
“fact” that it was round; and that belief kept the
sailors of the medieval world from wandering out of
sight of land as effectively as would a string of gun-boats
or floating mines. An idea is a solid fact, a
theory is a solid fact, a superstition is a solid fact as
long as people continue to regulate their actions in
terms of the idea, theory, or superstition; and it is
none the less solid because it is conveyed as an image
or a breath of sound.
This world of ideas serves many purposes. Two of
them bear heavily upon our investigation of utopia.
On one hand the pseudo-environment or idolum is a
substitute for the external world; it is a sort of house
of refuge to which we flee when our contacts with
“hard facts” become too complicated to carry through
or too rough to face. On the other hand, it is by means
of the idolum that the facts of the everyday world are
brought together and assorted and sifted, and a new
sort of reality is projected back again upon the external
world. One of these functions is escape or
compensation; it seeks an immediate release from the
difficulties or frustrations of our lot. The other attempts
to provide a condition for our release in the
future. The utopias that correspond to these two
functions I shall call the utopias of escape and the
utopias of reconstruction. The first leaves the external
world the way it is; the second seeks to change it
so that one may have intercourse with it on one’s own
terms. In one we build impossible castles in the air;
in the other we consult a surveyor and an architect
and a mason and proceed to build a house which meets
our essential needs; as well as houses made of stone
and mortar are capable of meeting them.
Why, however, should we find it necessary to talk
about utopia and the world of ideas at all? Why
should we not rest secure in the bosom of the material
environment, without flying off into a region apparently
beyond space and time? Well, the alternative
before us is not whether we shall live in the real world
or dream away our time in utopia; for men are so
constituted that only by a deliberate discipline—such
as that followed by a Hindu ascetic or an American
business man—can one or the other world be abolished
from consciousness. The genuine alternative for most
of us is that between an aimless utopia of escape and
a purposive utopia of reconstruction. One way or the
other, it seems, in a world so full of frustrations as
the “real” one, we must spend a good part of our
mental lives in utopia.
Nevertheless this needs a qualification. It is plain
that certain types of people have no need for private
utopias and that certain communities seem to be without
them. The savages of the Marquesas whom Hermann
Melville described seem to have had such a jolly
and complete adjustment to their environment that,
except for the raids of hostile tribes—and this turned
out to be chiefly sport which only whetted their appetites
for the feast that followed—everything needed
for a good life at the South Sea level could be obtained
by direct attack. The Marquesans had no need to
dream of a happier existence; they had only to grab it.
At times, during childhood perhaps, life has the
same sort of completeness; and without doubt there are
many mature people who have manufactured out of
their limitations a pretty adequate response to a narrow
environment; and have let it go at that. Such
people feel no need for utopia. As long as they can
keep their contacts restricted, only a deliberate raid
from the outside world would create such a need. They
are like the sick man in the parable of the Persian poet,
whose only desire was that he might desire something;
and there is no particular reason to envy them. People
who will not venture out into the open sea pay the
penalty of never having looked into the bright eyes of
danger; and at best they know but half of life. What
such folk might call the good life is simply not good
enough. We cannot be satisfied with a segment of
existence, no matter how safely we may be adjusted to
it, when with a little effort we can trace the complete
circle.
But there have been few regions, few social orders,
and few people in which the adjustment has not been
incomplete. In the face of perpetual difficulties and
obstructions—the wind and the weather and the impulses
of other men and customs that have long outlived
their use—there are three ways, roughly, in which
a man may react. He may run away. He may try
to hold his own. He may attack. Looking around at
our contemporaries who have survived the war, it is
fairly evident that most of them are in the first stage
of panic and despair. In an interesting article on The
Dénouement of Nihilism, Mr. Edward Townsend Booth
characterized the generation born in the late eighties
as suffering a complete paralysis of will, or else, “if
any initiative remains to them, they emigrate to Europe
or the South Sea Islands, or crawl off into some quiet
corner of the United States—but most of them continue
where they were stricken in a state of living
death.”
Speaking more generally, running away does not
always mean a physical escape, nor does an “attack”
necessarily mean doing something practical “on the
spot.” Let us use Dr. John Dewey’s illustration and
suppose that a man is denied intercourse with his
friends at a distance. One kind of reaction is for him
to “imagine” meeting his friends, and going through,
in fantasy, a whole ritual of meeting, repartee, and
discussion. The other kind of reaction, as Dr. Dewey
says, is to see what conditions must be met in order to
cement distant friends, and then invent the telephone.
The so-called extrovert, the type of man who has no
need for utopias, will satisfy his desire by talking to
the nearest human being. (“He may try to hold his
own.”) But it is fairly plain that the extrovert, from
the very weakness and inconstancy of his aims, is incapable
of contributing anything but “good nature”
to the good life of the community; and in his hands
both art and invention would probably come to an
end.
Now putting aside the extrovert, we find that the two
remaining types of reaction have expressed themselves
in all the historic utopias. It is perhaps well that we
should see them first in their normal, everyday setting,
before we set out to explore the ideal commonwealths
of the past.
More or less, we have all had glimpses of the utopia
of escape: it is raised and it collapses and it is built up
again almost daily. In the midst of the clanking
machinery of a paper factory I have come across a
moving picture actress’s portrait, stuck upon an inoperative
part of the machine; and it was not hard to
reconstruct the private utopia of the wretch who
minded the levers, or to picture the world into which he
had fled from the roar and throb and muck of the machinery
about him. What man has not had this utopia
from the dawn of adolescence onwards—the desire to
possess and be possessed by a beautiful woman?
Perhaps for the great majority of men and women
that small, private Utopia is the only one for which
they feel a perpetual, warm interest; and ultimately
every other utopia must be translatable to them in
some such intimate terms. Their conduct would tell
us as much if their words did not confess it. They
leave their bleak office buildings and their grimy factories,
and night after night they pour into the cinema
theater in order that they may live for a while in a
land populated by beautiful, flirtatious women and
tender, lusty men. Small wonder that the great and
powerful religion founded by Mahomet puts that utopia
in the very foreground of the hereafter! In a sense,
this is the most elementary of utopias; for, on the
interpretation of the analytical psychologist, it carries
with it the deep longing to return to and remain at
rest in the mother’s womb—the one perfect environment
which all the machinery and legislation of an eager
world has never been able to reproduce.
In its most elemental state, this utopia of escape
calls for a complete breach with the butcher, the baker,
the grocer, and the real, limited, imperfect people that
flutter around us. In order to make it more perfect,
we eliminate the butcher and baker and transport ourselves
to a self-sufficient island in the South Seas. For
the most part, of course, this is an idle dream, and if we
do not grow out of it, we must at any rate thrust other
conditions into it; but for a good many of us, idleness
without a dream is the only alternative. Out of such
fantasies of bliss and perfection, which do not endure
in real life even when they occasionally bloom into existence,
our art and literature have very largely grown.
It is hard to conceive of a social order so complete and
satisfactory that it would rob us of the necessity of
having recourse, from time to time, to an imaginary
world in which our sufferings could be purged or our
delights heightened. Even in the great idyll painted
by William Morris, women are fickle and lovers are
disappointed; and when the “real” world becomes a
little too hard and too sullen to face, we must take
refuge, if we are to recover our balance, into another
world which responds more perfectly to our deeper
interests and desires—the world of literature.
Once we have weathered the storm, it is dangerous
to remain in the utopia of escape; for it is an enchanted
island, and to remain there is to lose one’s
capacity for dealing with things as they are. The
girl who has felt Prince Charming’s caresses too long
will be repulsed by the clumsy embraces of the young
man who takes her to the theater and wonders how
the deuce he is going to pay the rent if they spend
more than a week on their honeymoon. Moreover, life
is too easy in the utopia of escape, and too blankly
perfect—there is nothing to sharpen your teeth upon.
It is not for this that men have gone into the jungle
to hunt beasts and have cajoled the grasses and roots
to be prolific, and have defied, in little open boats, the
terror of the wind and sea. Our daily diet must have
more roughage in it than these daydreams will give us
if we are not to become debilitated.
In the course of our journey into utopia we shall
remain a little while in these utopias of escape; but
we shall not bide there long. There are plenty of
them, and they dot the waters of our imaginary world
as the islands that Ulysses visited dotted the Ægean
Sea. These utopias however belong to the department
of pure literature, and in that department they occupy
but a minor place. We could dispense with the whole
lot of them, bag and baggage, in exchange for another
Anna Karenin or The Brothers Karamazov.
The second kind of utopia which we shall encounter
is the utopia of reconstruction.
The first species represents, the analytical psychologist
would tell us, a very primitive kind of thinking,
in which we follow the direction of our desires without
taking into account any of the limiting conditions
which we should have to confront if we came back to
earth and tried to realize our wishes in practical affairs.
It is a vague and messy and logically inconsequent
series of images which color up and fade, which
excite us and leave us cold, and which—for the sake
of the respect our neighbors have for our ability to
add a ledger or plane a piece of wood—we had better
confine to the strange box of records we call our brain.
The second type of utopia may likewise be colored
by primitive desires and wishes; but these desires and
wishes have come to reckon with the world in which
they seek realization. The utopia of reconstruction is
what its name implies: a vision of a reconstituted environment
which is better adapted to the nature and
aims of the human beings who dwell within it than the
actual one; and not merely better adapted to their
actual nature, but better fitted to their possible developments.
If the first utopia leads backward into
the utopian’s ego, the second leads outward—outward
into the world.
By a reconstructed environment I do not mean
merely a physical thing. I mean, in addition, a new
set of habits, a fresh scale of values, a different net of
relationships and institutions, and possibly—for almost
all utopias emphasize the factor of breeding—an alteration
of the physical and mental characteristics of the
people chosen, through education, biological selection,
and so forth. The reconstructed environment which
all the genuine utopians seek to contrive is a reconstruction
of both the physical world and the idolum.
It is in this that the utopian distinguishes himself from
the practical inventor and the industrialist. Every
attempt that has been made to domesticate animals,
cultivate plants, dredge rivers, dig ditches, and in
modern times, apply the energy of the sun to mechanical
instruments, has been an effort to reconstruct the environment;
and in many cases the human advantage has
been plain. It is not for the utopian to despise
Prometheus who brought the fire or Franklin who captured
the lightning. As Anatole France says: “Without
the Utopians of other times, men would still live in
caves, miserable and naked. It was Utopians who
traced the lines of the first city.... Out of generous
dreams come beneficial realities. Utopia is the
principle of all progress, and the essay into a better
future.”
Our physical reconstructions however have been limited;
they have touched chiefly the surfaces of things.
The result is that people live in a modern physical
environment and carry in their minds an odd assortment
of spiritual relics from almost every other age,
from that of the primitive, taboo-ridden savage, to the
energetic Victorian disciples of Gradgrind and Bounderby.
As Mr. Hendrik van Loon pithily says: “A
human being with the mind of a sixteenth century
tradesman driving a 1921 Rolls-Royce is still a human
being with the mind of a sixteenth century tradesman.”
The problem is fundamentally a human problem. The
more completely man is in control of physical nature,
the more urgently we must ask ourselves what under
the heavens is to move and guide and keep in hand the
controller. This problem of an ideal, a goal, an end—even
if the aim persist in shifting as much as the magnetic
north pole—is a fundamental one to the utopian.
Except in the writings of the utopians, and this
is an important point to notice in our travels through
utopia, the reconstruction of the material environment
and the reconstitution of the mental framework of the
creatures who inhabit it, have been kept in two different
compartments. One compartment is supposed to
belong to the practical man; the other to the idealist.
The first was something whose aims could be realized
in the Here and Now; the other was postponed very
largely to the sweet by-and-bye. Neither the practical
man nor the idealist has been willing to admit that he
has been dealing with a single problem; that each has
been treating the faces of a single thing as if they were
separate.
Here is where the utopia of reconstruction wins
hands down. It not merely pictures a whole world, but
it faces every part of it at the same time. We shall
not examine the classic utopias without becoming
conscious of their weaknesses, their sometimes disturbing
idiosyncrasies. It is important at present that we
should realize their virtues; and should start on our
journey without the feeling of disparagement which
the word utopian usually calls up in minds that have
been seduced by Macaulay’s sneer that he would rather
have an acre in Middlesex than a principality in utopia.
Finally, be convinced about the reality of utopia.
All that has happened in what we call human history—unless
it has left a building or a book or some other
record of itself—is just as remote and in a sense just
as mythical as the mysterious island which Raphael
Hythloday, scholar and sailor, described to Sir Thomas
More. A good part of human history is even more
insubstantial: the Icarians who lived only in the mind
of Étienne Cabet, or the Freelanders who dwelt within
the imagination of a dry little Austrian economist, have
had more influence upon the lives of our contemporaries
than the Etruscan people who once dwelt in Italy, although
the Etruscans belong to what we call the real
world, and the Freelanders and Icarians inhabited—Nowhere.
Nowhere may be an imaginary country, but News
from Nowhere is real news. The world of ideas, beliefs,
fantasies, projections, is (I must emphasize
again) just as real whilst it is acted upon as the post
which Dr. Johnson kicked in order to demonstrate that
it was solid. The man who wholly respects the rights
of property is kept out of his neighbor’s field perhaps
even more effectively than the man who is merely forbidden
entrance by a no-trespass sign. In sum, we
cannot ignore our utopias. They exist in the same
way that north and south exist; if we are not familiar
with their classical statements we at least know them
as they spring to life each day in our own minds. We
can never reach the points of the compass; and so no
doubt we shall never live in utopia; but without the
magnetic needle we should not be able to travel intelligently
at all. It is absurd to dispose of utopia by
saying that it exists only on paper. The answer to
this is: precisely the same thing may be said of the
architect’s plans for a house, and houses are none the
worse for it.
We must lose our sense of remoteness and severity
in setting out on this exploration of ideal commonwealths,
as some of the fine minds of the past have
pictured them. Our ideals are not something that we
can set apart from the main facts of our existence, as
our grandmothers sometimes set the cold, bleak, and
usually moldy parlor apart from the living rooms of
the house: on the contrary, the things we dream of
tend consciously or unconsciously to work themselves
out in the pattern of our daily lives. Our utopias are
just as human and warm and jolly as the world out of
which they are born. Looking out from the top of a
high tenement, over the housetops of Manhattan, I can
see a pale tower with its golden pinnacle gleaming
through the soft morning haze; and for a moment all
the harsh and ugly lines in the landscape have disappeared.
So in looking at our utopias. We need not
abandon the real world in order to enter these realizable
worlds; for it is out of the first that the second
are always coming.
Finally, an anticipation and a warning. In our
journey through the utopias of the past we shall not
rest content when we have traversed the whole territory
between Plato and the latest modern writer. If the
story of utopia throws any light upon the story of
mankind it is this: our utopias have been pitifully weak
and inadequate; and if they have not exercised enough
practical influence upon the course of affairs, it is because,
as Viola Paget says in Gospels of Anarchy, they
were simply not good enough. We travel through utopia
only in order to get beyond utopia: if we leave the domains
of history when we enter the gates of Plato’s Republic,
we do so in order to re-enter more effectively the
dusty midday traffic of the contemporary world. So
our study of the classic utopias will be followed by an
examination of certain social myths and partial utopias
that have played an important part in the affairs of
the Western World during the last few centuries. In
the end, I promise, I shall make no attempt to present
another utopia; it will be enough to survey the foundations
upon which others may build.
In the meanwhile, our ship is about to set sail; and
we shall not heave anchor again until we reach the
coasts of Utopia.
CHAPTER TWO
How the Greeks lived in a New World, and utopia
seemed just round the corner. How Plato, in the
Republic, is chiefly concerned with what will hold
the ideal city together.
Before the great empires of Rome and Macedonia
began to spread their camps through the length and
breadth of the Mediterranean world, there was a time
when the vision of an ideal city seems to have been
uppermost in the minds of a good many men. Just as
the wide expanse of unsettled territory in America
caused the people of eighteenth century Europe to
think of building a civilization in which the errors and
vices and superstitions of the old world might be left
behind, so the sparsely settled coasts of Italy, Sicily,
and the Ægean Islands, and the shores of the Black
Sea, must have given men the hope of being able to
turn over a fresh page.
Those years between six hundred and three hundred
B.C. were city-building years for the parent cities of
Greece. The city of Miletus is supposed to have begotten
some three hundred cities, and many of its fellows
were possibly not less fruitful. Since new cities
could be founded there was plenty of chance for variation
and experiment; and those who dreamed of a more,
generous social order could set their hands and wits to
making a better start “from the bottom up.”
Of all the plans and reconstruction programs that
must have been put forward during these centuries,
only a scant handful remains. Aristotle tells us about
an ideal state designed by one, Phaleas, who believed
like Mr. Bernard Shaw in a complete equality of property;
and from Aristotle, too, we learn of another
utopia which was described by the great architect, city
planner, and sociologist—Hippodamus. Hippodamus
was one of the first city planners known to history,
and he achieved fame in the ancient world by designing
cities on the somewhat monotonous checkerboard design
we know so well in America. He realized, apparently,
that a city was something more than a collection of
houses, streets, markets, and temples; and so, whilst
he was putting the physical town to rights, he concerned
himself with the more basic problem of the social
order. If it adds at all to our sense of reality in going
through utopia, let me confess that it is ultimately
through the inspiration and example of another Hippodamus—Patrick
Geddes, the town planner for
Jerusalem and many other cities—that this book about
utopias came to be written. In many ways the distance
between Geddes and Aristotle or Hippodamus seems
much less than that which separates Geddes and Herbert
Spencer.
When we look at the utopias that Phaleas and Hippodamus
and Aristotle have left us, and compare them
with the Republic of Plato, the differences between them
melt into insignificance and their likenesses are apparent.
It is for this reason that I shall confine our
examination of the Greek utopia to that which Plato
set forth in the Republic, and qualified and broadened in
The Laws, The Statesman, and Critias.
Plato’s Republic dates roughly from the time of
that long and disastrous war which Athens fought with
Sparta. In the course of such a war, amid the bombast
that patriotic citizens give way to, the people who keep
their senses are bound to get pretty well acquainted with
their enemy. If you will take the trouble to examine
Plutarch’s account of the Laws of Lycurgus and Mr.
Alfred Zimmern’s magnificent description of the Greek
Commonwealth you will see how Sparta and Athens
form the web and woof of the Republic—only it is an
ideal Sparta and an ideal Athens that Plato has in
mind.
It is well to remember that Plato wrote in the midst
of defeat; a great part of his region, Attica, had been
devastated and burned; and he must have felt that
makeshift and reform were quite futile when a Peloponnesian
war could make the bottom drop out of his world.
To Plato an ill-designed ship of state required more
than the science of navigation to pull it through stormy
waters: if it was in danger of perpetually foundering,
it seemed high time to go back to the shipyards and
inquire into the principles upon which it had been put
together. In such a mood, I suggest parenthetically,
we today will turn again to fundamentals.
In describing his ideal community Plato, like a
trained workman, begins with his physical foundations.
So far from putting his utopia in a mythical island of
Avilion, where falls not hail nor rain nor any snow,
it is plain that Plato was referring repeatedly to the
soil in which Athens was planted, and to the economic
life which grew out of that soil. Since he was speaking
to his own countrymen, he could let a good many things
pass for common knowledge which we, as strangers,
must look into more carefully in order to have a firmer
sense of his utopian realities. Let it be understood that
in discussing the physical side of the Republic, I am
drawing from Aristotle as well as Plato, and from such
modern Greek scholars as Messrs. Zimmern, Myres, and
Murray.
Nowadays when we talk about a state we think of an
expanse of territory, to begin with, so broad that we
should in most cases be unable to see all its boundaries
if we rose five miles above the ground on a clear day.
Even if the country is a little one, like the Netherlands
or Belgium, it is likely to have possessions that are
thousands of miles away; and we think of these distant
possessions and of the homeland as part and parcel of
the state. There is scarcely any conceivable way in
which a Dutchman in Rotterdam, let us say, possesses
the Island of Java: he does not live on the island, he
is not acquainted with the inhabitants, he does not
share their ideas or customs. His interest in Java, if
he have an interest at all, is an interest in sugar, coffee,
taxes, or missions. His state is not a commonwealth in
the sense that it is a common possession.
To the Greek of Plato’s time, on the contrary, the
commonwealth was something he actively shared with
his fellow citizens. It was a definite parcel of land
whose limits he could probably see from any convenient
hilltop; and those who lived within those limits had
common gods to worship, common theaters and gymnasia,
and a multitude of common interests that could
be satisfied only by their working together, playing
together, thinking together. Plato could probably not
have conceived of a community with civilized pretensions
in which the population was distributed at the
rate of ten per square mile; and if he visited such a
territory he would surely have said that the people
were barbarians—men whose way of living unfitted
them for the graces and duties of citizenship.
Geographically speaking, then, the ideal commonwealth
was a city-region; that is, a city which was
surrounded by enough land to supply the greater part
of the food needed by the inhabitants; and placed convenient
to the sea.
Let us stand on a high hill and take a look at this
city-region; the sort of view that Plato himself might
have obtained on some clear spring morning when he
climbed to the top of the Acropolis and looked down
on the sleeping city, with the green fields and sear upland
pastures on one side, and the sun glinting on the
distant waters of the sea a few miles away.
It is a mountainous region, this Greece, and within
a short distance from mountain top to sea there was
compressed as many different kinds of agricultural and
industrial life as one could single out in going down
the Hudson valley from the Adirondack Mountains to
New York Harbor. As the basis for his ideal city,
whether Plato knew it or not, he had an “ideal” section
of land in his mind—what the geographer calls the
“valley section.” He could not have gotten the various
groups which were to be combined in his city, had they
been settled in the beginning on a section of land like the
coastal plain of New Jersey. It was peculiarly in
Greece that such a variety of occupations could come
together within a small area, beginning at the summit
of the valley section with the evergreen trees and the
woodcutter, going down the slope to the herdsman and
his flock of goats at pasture, along the valley bottom
to the cultivator and his crops, until at length one
reaches the river’s mouth where the fisher pushes out to
sea in his boat and the trader comes in with goods
from other lands.
The great civilizations of the world have been
nourished in such valley sections. We think of the river
Nile and Alexandria; the Tiber and Rome, the Seine
and Paris; and so on. It is interesting that our first
great utopia should have had an “ideal” section of
territory as its base.
In the economic foundations of the Republic, we
look in vain for a recognition of the labor problem.
Now the labor problem is a fundamental difficulty in
our modern life; and it seems on the surface that Plato
is a little highbrow and remote in the ease with which
he gets over it. When we look more closely into the
matter, however, and see the way in which men got their
living in the “morning lands”—as the Germans call
them—we shall find that the reason Plato does not offer
a solution is that he was not, indeed, confronted by a
problem.
Given a valley section which has not been ruthlessly
stript of trees; given the arts of agriculture and herding;
given a climate without dangerous extremes of
heat and cold; given the opportunity to found new colonies
when the old city-region is over-populated—and
it is only by an exercise of ingenuity that a labor problem
could be invented. A man might become a slave
by military capture; he did not become a slave by being
compelled, under threat of starvation, to tend a machine.
The problem of getting a living was answered
by nature as long as men were willing to put up with
nature’s conditions; and the groundwork of Plato’s
utopia, accordingly, is the simple agricultural life, the
growing of wheat, barley, olives, and grapes, which
had been fairly well mastered before he arrived on the
scene. As long as the soil was not washed away and
devitalized, the problem was not a hard one; and in
order to solve it, Plato had only to provide that there
should be enough territory to grow food on, and that
the inhabitants must not let their wants exceed the
bounties of nature.
Plato describes the foundations of his community
with a few simple and masterly touches. Those who
feel that there is something a little inhuman in his
conception of the good life, when he is discussing the
education and duties of the ruling classes, may well
consider the picture that he paints for us here.
Plato’s society arises out of the needs of mankind;
because none of us is self-sufficing and all have many
wants; and since there are many wants, many kinds
of people must supply them. When all these helpers
and partners and co-operators are gathered together
in a city the body of inhabitants is termed a state;
and so its members work and exchange goods with one
another for their mutual advantage—the herdsman gets
barley for his cheese and so on down to the complicated
interchanges that occur in the city. What sort of
physical life will arise out of this in the region that
Plato describes?
Well, the people will “produce corn and wine and
clothes and shoes and build houses for themselves....
They will work in summer commonly stript and barefoot,
but in winter substantially clothed and shod. They
will feed on barley and wheat, baking the wheat and
kneading the flour, making noble puddings and loaves;
these they will serve up on a mat of reeds or clean
leaves; themselves reclining the while upon beds of yew
or myrtle boughs. And they and their children will
feast, drinking of the wine which they have made, wearing
garlands on their heads, and having the praises of
the gods on their lips, living in sweet society, and having
a care that their families do not exceed their means;
for they will have an eye to poverty or war.”
So Socrates, in this dialogue on the Republic,
describes to his hearers the essential physical elements
of the good life. One of his hearers, Glaucon, asks
him to elaborate it a little, for Socrates has limited
himself to bare essentials. It is the same sort of objection,
by the way, that M. Poincaré, the physicist,
made to the philosophy of Tolstoy. Socrates answers
that a good state would have the healthy constitution
which he has just described; but that he has no objection
to looking at an “inflamed constitution.” What
Socrates describes as an inflamed constitution is a mode
of life which all the people of Western Europe and
America at the present day—no matter what their
religion, economic status, or political creed may be—believe
in with almost a single mind; and so, although it
is the opposite of Plato’s ideal state, I go on to present
it, for the light it throws on our own institutions and
habits.
The unjust state comes into existence, says Plato
through the mouth of Socrates, by the multiplication
of wants and superfluities. As a result of increasing
wants, we must enlarge our borders, for the original
healthy state is too small. Now the city will fill up
with a multitude of callings which go beyond those
required by any natural want; there will be a host of
parasites and “supers”; and our country, which was
big enough to support the original inhabitants, will
want a slice of our neighbor’s land for pasture and tillage;
and they will want a slice of ours if, like ourselves,
they exceed the limits of necessity and give themselves
up to the unlimited accumulation of wealth. “And
then we shall go to war—that will be the next thing.”
The sum of this criticism is that Plato saw clearly
that an ideal community must have a common physical
standard of living; and that boundless wealth or unlimited
desires and gratifications had nothing to do
with a good standard. The good was what was necessary;
and what was necessary was not, essentially,
many goods.
Like Aristotle, Plato wanted a mode of life which
was neither impoverished nor luxurious: those who
have read a little in Greek history will see that this
Athenian ideal of the good life fell rather symbolically
between Sparta and Corinth, between the cities which
we associate respectively with a hard, military life and
with a soft, super-sensuous æstheticism.
Should we moderate our wants or should we increase
production? Plato had no difficulty in answering this
question. He held that a reasonable man would moderate
his wants; and that if he wished to live like a
good farmer or a good philosopher he would not attempt
to copy the expenditures of a vulgar gambler
who has just made a corner in wheat, or a vulgar
courtesan who has just made a conquest of the vulgar
gambler who has made a corner in wheat. Wealth and
poverty, said Plato, are the two causes of deterioration
in the arts: both the workman and his works are likely
to degenerate under the influence of either poverty or
wealth, “for one is the parent of luxury and indolence,
and the other of meanness and viciousness, and both
of discontent.”
Nor does Plato have one standard of living for his
ruling classes and another for the common people. To
each person he would give all the material things necessary
for sustenance; and from each he would be prepared
to strip all that was not essential. He realized
that the possession of goods was not a means of getting
happiness, but an effort to make up for a spiritually
depauperate life: for Plato, happiness was what one
could put into life and not what one could loot out of
it: it was the happiness of the dancer rather than the
happiness of the glutton. Plato pictured a community
living a sane, continent, athletic, clear-eyed life; a
community that would be always, so to say, within
bounds. There is a horror of laxity and easy living in
his Republic. His society was stripped for action.
The fragrance that permeates his picture of the good
life is not the heavy fragrance of rose-petals and incense
falling upon languorous couches: it is the
fragrance of the morning grass, and the scent of
crushed mint or marjoram beneath the feet.
How big is Plato’s community, how are the people
divided, what are their relations? Now that we have
discussed the lay out of the land, and have inquired into
the physical basis of this utopia, we are ready to turn
our attention to the people; for it is out of the interaction
of folk, work, and place that every community—good
or bad, real or fancied—exists and perpetuates
itself.
It follows almost inevitably from what we have said
of Plato’s environment, that his ideal community was
not to be unlimited in population. Quite the contrary.
Plato said that “the city may increase to any size
which is consistent with its unity; that is the limit.”
The modern political scientist, who lives within a national
state of millions of people, and who thinks of
the greatness of states largely in terms of their population,
has scoffed without mercy at the fact that Plato
limited his community to an arbitrary number, 5,040,
about the number that can be conveniently addressed
by a single orator. As a matter of fact there is nothing
ridiculous in Plato’s definition: he was not speaking of
a horde of barbarians: he was laying down the foundations
for an active polity of citizens: and it is plain
enough in all conscience that when you increase the
number of people in a community you decrease the
number of things that they can share in common. Plato
could not anticipate the wireless telephone and the
daily newspaper; still less would he have been likely
to exaggerate the difference which these instrumentalities
have made in the matters that most intimately
concern us; and when he set bounds to the population
his city would contain, he was anticipating by more
than two thousand years the verdict of modern town
planners like Mr. Raymond Unwin.
People are not the members of a community because
they live under the same system of political government
or dwell in the same country. They become genuine
citizens to the extent that they share certain institutions
and ways of life with similarly educated people.
Plato was primarily concerned with providing conditions
which would make a community hold together
without being acted upon by any external force—as
the national state is acted upon today by war or the
threat of war. This concern seems to underlie every
line of the Republic. In attacking his problem, the
business of supplying the physical wants of the city
seemed relatively unimportant; and even though Greece
in the time of Plato traded widely with the whole Mediterranean
region, Plato did not mistake commercial
unity for civic unity. Hence in his scheme of things
the work of the farmer and the merchant and the trader
was subordinate. The important thing to consider was
the general conditions under which all the individuals
and groups in a community might live together
harmoniously. This is a long cry from the utopias of
the nineteenth century, which we will examine later;
and that is why it is important to understand Plato’s
point of view and follow his argument.
To Plato, a good community was like a healthy body;
a harmonious exercise of every function was the condition
of its strength and vitality. Necessarily then a
good community could not be simply a collection of individuals,
each one of whom insists upon some private
and particular happiness without respect to the welfare
and interests of his fellows. Plato believed that goodness
and happiness—for he would scarcely admit that
there was any distinct line of cleavage between these
qualities—consisted in living according to nature; that
is to say, in knowing one’s self, in finding one’s bent,
and in fulfilling the particular work which one had the
capacity to perform. The secret of a good community,
therefore, if we may translate Plato’s language into
modern political slang, is the principle of function.
Every kind of work, says Plato, requires a particular
kind of aptitude and training. If we wish to have good
shoes, our shoes must be made by a shoemaker and
not by a weaver; and in like manner, every man has
some particular calling to which his genius leads him,
and he finds a happiness for himself and usefulness to
his fellows when he is employed in that calling. The
good life must result when each man has a function to
perform, and when all the necessary functions are adjusted
happily to each other. The state is like the
physical body. “Health is the creation of a natural
order and government in the parts of the body, and
the creation of disease is the creation of a state of
things in which they are at variance with the natural
order.” The supreme virtue in the commonwealth is
justice; namely, the due apportionment of work or
function under the rule of “a place for every man and
every man in his place.”
Has any such society ever come into existence? Do
not too hastily answer No. The ideal in Plato’s mind
is carried out point for point in the organization of
a modern symphony orchestra.
Now Plato was not unaware that there were other
formulas for happiness. He expressly points out however
that in founding the Republic he does not wish to
make any single person or group happier beyond the
rest; he desires rather that the whole city should be in
the happiest condition. It would be easy enough “to
array the husbandmen in rich and costly robes and to
enjoin them to cultivate the ground only with a view
to their pleasure,” and so Plato might have conferred a
spurious kind of felicity upon every individual. If
this happened, however, there would be a brief period
of ease and revelry before the whole works went to pot.
In this Plato is a thoroughgoing realist: he is not looking
for a short avenue of escape; he is ready to face
the road with all its ups and downs, with its steep
climbs as well as its wide vistas; and he does not think
any the worse of life because he finds that its chief enjoyments
rest in activity, and not, as the epicureans
of all sorts have always believed, in a release from
activity.
Plato arrives at his apportionment of functions by
a method which is old-fashioned, and which anybody
versed in modern psychology would regard as a “rationalization.”
Plato is trying to give a firm basis to
the division of classes which he favored; and so he compares
the community to a human being, possessed of
the virtues of wisdom, valour, temperance, and justice.
Each of these virtues Plato relates to a particular
class of people.
Wisdom is appropriate to the rulers of the city.
Thus arises the class of guardians.
Valour is the characteristic of the defenders of the
city and hence a military class, called auxiliaries, appears.
Temperance, or agreement, is the virtue which relates
to all classes.
Finally, there comes justice. “Justice is the ultimate
cause and condition of all of them.... If a question
should arise as to which of these four qualities
contributed most by their presence to the excellence
of the State whether the agreement of rulers and subjects
or the preservation in the soldiers of the opinion
which the law ordains about the true nature of dangers,
or wisdom and watchfulness in the rulers would claim
the palm, or whether this which I am about to mention,”
namely, “everyone doing his own work and not being
a busybody—the question would not be easily determined.”
Nevertheless, it is plain that justice is the
keystone of the Platonic utopia.
We must not misunderstand Plato’s division of
classes. Aristotle criticizes Plato in terms of a more
simple system of democracy; but Plato did not mean
to institute a fixed order; within his Republic the
Napoleonic motto—la carrière est ouverte aux talents—was
the guiding principle. What lay beneath Plato’s
argument was a belief which present-day studies in
psychology seem likely to confirm; a belief that children
come into the world with a bent already well marked
in their physical and mental constitutions. Plato advocated,
it is true, an aristocracy or government by the
best people; but he did not believe in fake aristocracies
that are perpetuated through hereditary wealth and
position. Having determined that his city was to
contain three classes, rulers, warriors, and workers,
his capital difficulty still remained to be faced; how
was each individual to find his way to the right class,
and under what conditions would he best fulfill his functions
there?
The answers to these questions bring us to the boldest
and most original sections of the Republic: the part
that has provoked the greatest amount of antagonism
and aversion, because of its drastic departure from the
rut of many established institutions—in particular, individual
marriages and individual property.
In order to perpetuate his ideal constitution Plato
relies upon three methods: breeding, education, and a
discipline for the daily life. Let us consider the effect
of these methods upon each of the classes.
We may dismiss the class of artisans and husbandmen
very briefly. It is not quite clear whether Plato
meant his system of marriage to extend to the members
of this class. As for education, it is clear that he saw
nothing to find fault with in the system of apprenticeship
whereby the smith or the potter or the farmer
trained others to follow his calling; and so he had no
reason for departing from methods which had proved,
on the whole, very satisfactory. How satisfactory
that system was, indeed, we have only to look at an
Athenian ruin or vase or chalice to find out. Any improvements
that might come about in these occupations
would result from the Platonic rule of justice; and
Plato followed his own injunction strictly enough to
keep away from other people’s business.
This of course seems an odd and hasty manner of
treatment, as I said before, to those of us who live in a
world where the affairs of industry and the tendencies
of the labor movement are forever on the carpet. But
Plato justifies his treatment by saying that “when shoemakers
become bad, and are degenerate, and profess to
be shoemakers when they are not, no great mischief
happens to the state; but when the guardians of the
law and the State are not so in reality, but only in
appearance, you see how they entirely destroy the
whole constitution, if they alone shall have the privilege
of an affluent and happy life.” Hence Plato concentrates
his attack upon the point of greatest danger:
while the shoemaker, as a rule, knows how to mind his
own business, the statesman is for the most part unaware
of the essential business which he has to mind;
and tends to be negligent even when he has some dim
notion as to what it may be—being all too ready to
sacrifice it to golf or the favors of a beautiful woman.
As we saw in Plato’s original description of the State,
the common folk would doubtless have a good many
of the joys and delights traditional in the Greek cities;
and doubtless, although Plato says nothing one way or
the other, they would be permitted to own such property
as might be needed for the conduct of their business
or the enjoyment of their homes. The very fact that
no definite rule was prescribed for them, makes us
suspect that Plato was willing to let these things go
on in the usual way.
The next class is known as the warriors, or auxiliaries.
They are different in character from the
guardians who rule the state; but frequently Plato
refers to the guardians as a single class, including the
auxiliaries; and it seems that they figured in his
mind as the temporal arm of that class. At any
rate, the auxiliaries as they are painted in the Critias,
which was the dialogue in which Plato attempted to
show his Republic in action, dwelt by themselves within
a single enclosure; and had common meals and common
temples of their own; and so we may surmise that
their way of life was to be similar to that of the higher
guardians, but that it was not capable of being pushed
to the same pitch of development on the intellectual
side. These warriors of Plato are, after all, not so
very much unlike the regular or standing army in a
modern State: they have a life of their own within the
barracks, they are trained and drilled to great endurance,
and they are taught to obey without question
the Government. When you examine the naked business
of the warriors and artisans, you discover that
Plato is not, for all the difference in scale, so very far
away from modern realities. Apart from the fact
that women were permitted an equal place with men
in the life of the camp and the gymnasium and the
academy, the real difference comes in the matter of
breeding and selection. At last we approach the Governors,
or the Guardians.
How does the Guardian achieve his position and
power? Plato is a little chary of answering this question;
he hints that it can only happen at the beginning
if a person with the brains of a philosopher happen to
be born with the authority of a king. Let us pass this
by. How are the Guardians born and bred? This is
the manner.
For the well-being of the state the Guardians have
the power to administer medicinal lies. One of these
is to be told to the youth when their education has
reached a point at which it becomes possible for the
Guardians to determine their natural talents and
aptitudes.
“Citizens, we shall say to them in our tale, you are
brothers, yet God has framed you differently. Some
of you have the power to command, and these he has
composed of gold, wherefore also they have the greatest
honor; others of silver, to be auxiliaries; others again
who are to be husbandmen and craftsmen he has made
of brass and iron; and the species will generally be
preserved in the children. But as you are of the same
original family, a golden parent will sometimes have a
silver son, or a silver parent a golden son. And God
proclaims to the rulers, as a first principle, that before
all things they should watch over their offspring, and
see what elements mingle in their nature, for if the
son of a golden or silver parent has an admixture of
brass and iron, then nature orders a transposition of
the ranks; and the eye of the ruler must not be pitiful
towards his child because he has to descend in the scale
and will become a husbandman or artisan, just as there
may be others sprung from the artisan class who are
raised to honor, and become guardians and auxiliaries.”
As the safeguard of this principle of natural selection
of functions, Plato proposed a system of common
marriage. “The wives of these guardians are to be
common, and their children are also common, and no
parent is to know his own child, nor any child his
parent. Starting from the day of the hymeneal, the
bridegroom who was then married will call all the male
children who are born ten and seven months afterwards
his sons, and the female children his daughters, and
they will call him father.... And those who were
born at the same time they will term brothers and
sisters, and they are not to intermarry.” One of the
features of this system is that the best stocks—the
strongest and wisest and most beautiful—are to be encouraged
to reproduce themselves. But this is not
worked out in detail. There is to be complete freedom
of sexual selection among the guardians; and those
who are most distinguished in their services are to have
access to a great number of women; but beyond encouraging
the guardians to be prolific, Plato did not
apparently consider the possibilities of cross-breeding
between the various classes.
On the whole, one may say that Plato puts it up to
the Guardians to perpetuate themselves properly, and
indicates that this is to be one of their main concerns.
His good breeding was biological breeding, not social
breeding. He recognized as some of our modern
eugenists have failed to—that good parents might
throw poor stock, on occasion, and that abject parents
might have remarkably good progeny. Even if the
Guardians are to be encouraged to have good children,
Plato provides that the children themselves must prove
their goodness before they are in turn recognized as
Guardians. As for the children of the baser sort—well,
they were to be rigorously limited to the needs
and resources of the community. Plato lived at a
time when a great many children were born only to be
murdered through “exposure” as it was called; and
he had no qualms, apparently, about letting the Guardians
send the children with a bad heredity into the discard.
If his population could not grow properly in
the sunlight without getting rid of the weeds, he was
prepared to get rid of the weeds. People who were
physically or spiritually too deformed to take part in
the good life were to be eliminated. Plato, like a robust
Athenian, was for killing or curing a disease; and he
gave short shrift to the constitutional invalids.
But to breed Guardians is only one-half the problem.
The other half comes under the heads of education and
discipline; and when Plato discusses these things, he
is not speaking, as a modern college president perhaps
would, of book-learning alone; he is referring to all
the activities that mold a person’s life. He follows the
older philosopher, Pythagoras, and anticipates the
great organizer, Benedict, by laying down a rule of
life for his guardians. He did not imagine that disinterested
activities, spacious thoughts, and clear vision
would arise in people who normally put their personal
comfort and “happiness” above the necessities of their
office.
Let us recognize the depth of Plato’s insight. It is
plain that he did not despise what a modern psychologist
would call “the normal biological career.” For the
great majority of people happiness consisted in learning
a definite trade or profession, in doing one’s daily
work, in mating, and when the tension of the day relaxed,
in getting enjoyment and recreation in the
simple sensualities of eating, drinking, singing, love-making,
and what not. This normal biological career is
associated with a home, and with the limited horizons
of a home; and a host of small loyalties and jealousies
and interests are woven into the very texture of that
life.
Each home, each small circle of relatives and friends,
tends to be a miniature utopia; there is a limited community
of goods, a tendency to adjust one’s actions to
the welfare of the little whole, and a habit of banding
together against the world at large. But the good,
contrary to the proverb, is frequently the enemy of the
better; and the little utopia of the family is the enemy—indeed
the principal enemy—of the beloved community.
This fact is notorious. The picture of a trade union
leader which Mr. John Galsworthy portrays in Strife,
whose power to act firmly in behalf of his group is
sapped by the demands made by family ties, could be
matched in a thousand places. In order to have the
freedom to act for the sake of a great institution, a
person must be stript of a whole host of restraining
ties and sentimentalities. Jesus commanded his followers
to leave their families and abandon their worldly
goods; and Plato, in order to preserve his ideal commonwealth,
laid down a similar rule. For those who as
guardians were to apply the science of government to
public affairs, a private life, private duties, private
interests, were all to be left behind.
As to the education of the Guardians, I have scarcely
the space to treat the more formal part of it in detail;
for among other things, as Jowett points out, the
Republic is a treatise on education; and Plato presents
a fairly elaborate plan. The two branches of Greek
education, music and gymnastic, applied in the student’s
early years to the culture of the body and the culture
of the mind; and both branches were to be followed in
common by both sexes. Instruction during the early
part of a child’s life was to be communicated through
play activities, as it is today in the City and Country
School in New York; and only with manhood did the
student approach his subjects in a more formal and
systematic manner. In the course of this education the
students were to be tested again and again with respect
to their mental keenness and tenacity and fortitude;
and only those who came through the fire purified and
strengthened were to be admitted to the class of
guardians.
The daily life of the Guardians is a rigorous, military
regime. They live in common barracks, and in order
to avoid paying attention to private affairs, instead
of minding the good of the whole community, no one
is allowed to “possess any substance privately, unless
there be a great necessity for it”; next, Plato continues,
none shall have any dwelling or storehouse into which
whoever inclines may not enter; and as for necessaries,
they shall be only such as brave and temperate warriors
may require, and as they are supported by other
citizens, they shall receive such a reward of their
guardianship as to have neither an overplus nor a
deficit at the end of the year. They shall have public
meals, as in encampments, and live in common. They
are to refrain from using gold and silver, as all the
gold and silver they require is in their souls.
All these regulations, of course, are for the purpose
of keeping the Guardians disinterested. Plato believed
that the majority of people did not know how to mind
public business; for it seemed to him that the ordering
of a community’s life required a measure of science
which the common man could not possibly possess. Indeed,
in a city of a thousand men he did not see the
possibility of getting as many as fifty men who would be
sufficiently well versed in what we should today call
sociology to deal intelligently with public affairs—for
there would scarcely be that many first-rate draughts
players. At the same time, if the government is to be
entrusted to a few, the few must be genuinely disinterested.
If they possessed lands and houses and money
in a private way they would become landlords and
farmers instead of Guardians; they would be hateful
masters instead of allies of the citizens; and so “hating
and being hated, plotting and being plotted against,
more afraid of the enemies within than the enemies
without, they would drag themselves and the rest of the
state to speedy destruction.”
It remains to take a glance at the manhood and
later life of the Guardians.
As young men, the Guardians belong to the auxiliaries;
and since they are not permitted to perform any
of the manual arts—for skill in any of the trades tended
to make a man warped and one-sided, like the symbolic
blacksmith god, Hephæstos—their physical edge was
maintained by the unceasing discipline of the gymnasium
and “military” expeditions. I put military in
quotation marks, because a greater part of the warriors’
time is spent not in war but in preparation for
war; and it is plain that Plato looked upon war as an
unnecessary evil, for it arose out of the unjust state;
and therefore he must have resorted to warlike discipline
for the educational values he found in it. From thirty-five
to fifty the potential Guardians undertake practical
activities, commanding armies and gaining experience
of life. After fifty, those who are qualified devote themselves
to philosophy: out of their experience and their
inner reflection they figure the essential nature of the
good community; and on occasion each guardian
abandons divine philosophy for a while, takes his turn
at the helm of the state, and trains his successors.
What is the business of the Guardian? How does
Plato’s ideal statesman differ from Julius Cæsar or
Mr. Theodore Roosevelt?
The business of the Guardian is to manufacture liberty.
The petty laws, regulations, and reforms with
which the ordinary statesman occupies himself had
nothing to do, in Plato’s mind, with the essential business
of the ruler. So Plato expressly foregoes making
laws to regulate marketing, the affairs of industry,
graft, bribery, theft, and so forth; and he leaves these
matters with the curt indication that men can be left
to themselves to devise on a voluntary basis the rules
of the game for the different occupations; and that
it is not the business of the Guardian to meddle in such
matters. In a well-founded state, a great number of
minor maladjustments would simply fall out of existence;
whilst in any other state, all the tinkering and
reforming in the world is quite powerless to amend its
organic defects. Those make-believe statesmen who
try their hand at legislation and “are always fancying
that by reforming they will make an end of the dishonesties
and rascalities of mankind,” do not know
that in reality they are trying to cut away the heads
of a hydra.
The real concern of the Guardians is with the essential
constitution of the state. The means that they
employ to perfect this constitution are breeding,
vocational selection, and education. “If once a
republic is set a-going, it proceeds happily, increasing
as a circle. And whilst good education and nurture
are preserved, they produce good geniuses; and good
geniuses, partaking of such education, produce still
better than the former, as well in other respects, as with
reference to propagation, as in the case of other animals.”
All the activities of the Republic are to be
patterned after the utopia which the Guardians see
with their inward eye. So gradually the community
becomes a living unity; and it exhibits the health of
that which is organically sound.
What do we miss when we look around this utopia
of Plato’s? Contacts with the outside world? We may
take them for granted. Downy beds, Corinthian girls,
luxurious furniture? We can well spare them. The
opportunity for a satisfactory intellectual and physical
life? No: both of these are here.
What Plato has left out are the poets, dramatists,
and painters. Literature and music, in order to contribute
to the noble education of the Guardians, are
both severely restricted in theme and in treatment.
Plato has his limitations; and here is the principal
one: Plato distrusted the emotional life, and whilst
he was prepared to do full homage to man’s obvious
sensualities, he feared the emotions as a tight-rope
walker fears the wind; for they threatened his balance.
In one significant passage he classifies “love” with
disease and drunkenness, as a vulgar misfortune; and
though he was ready to permit the active expression
of the emotions, as in the dance or the sexual act, he
treated the mere play upon the feelings, without active
participation, as a form of intemperance. Hence a
great deal of music and dramatic mimicry was taboo.
Foreign as this doctrine sounds to the modern reader,
there is perhaps more than a grain of sense in it:
William James used to teach that no one should passively
experience an emotion at a concert or a play
without trying to express that emotion actively as soon
as he could make the opportunity. At any rate, let us
leave this problem which Plato opens up with a free
mind; and note here in passing that in the utopia of
William Morris novels drop naturally out of existence
because life is too active an ecstasy to be fed with the
pathetic, the maudlin, and the diseased.
As we leave this little city of Plato’s, nestling in the
hills, and as the thin, didactic voice of Plato, who has
been perpetually at our elbows, dies away from our
ears—what impression do we finally carry away?
In the fields, men are perhaps plowing the land for
the autumn sowing; on the terraces, a band of men,
women, and children are plucking the olives carefully
from the trees, one by one; in the gymnasium on the
top of the Acropolis, men and youths are exercising,
and as they practice with the javelin now and then it
catches the sun and glints into our eye; apart from
these groups, in a shaded walk that overlooks the city,
a Guardian is pacing back and forth, talking in quick,
earnest tones with his pupils.
These are occupations which, crudely or elaborately,
men have always engaged in; and here in the Republic
they engage in them still. What has changed? What
has profoundly changed is not the things that men do,
but the relations they bear to one another in doing
them. In Plato’s community, servitude and compulsion
and avarice and indolence are gone. Men mind their
business for the sake of living well, in just relations
to the whole community of which they are a part.
They live, in the strictest sense, according to nature;
and because no one can enjoy a private privilege, each
man can grow to his full stature and enter into every
heritage of his citizenship. When Plato says no to the
institutions and ways of life that men have blindly
fostered, his eyes are open, and he is facing the light.
CHAPTER THREE
How something happened to utopia between Plato and
Sir Thomas More; and how utopia was discovered
again, along with the New World.
There is a span of nearly two thousand years between
Plato and Sir Thomas More. During that time, in
the Western World at any rate, utopia seems to disappear
beyond the horizon. Plutarch’s Life of Lycurgus
looks back into a mythical past; Cicero’s essay
on the state is a negligible work; and St. Augustine’s
City of God is chiefly remarkable for a brilliant journalistic
attack upon the old order of Rome which reminds
one of the contemporary diatribes of Maximilian
Harden. Except for these works there is, as far as I
can discover, scarcely any other piece of writing which
even hints at utopia except as utopia may refer to a
dim golden age in the past when all men were virtuous
and happy.
But while utopia dropt out of literature, it did not
drop out of men’s minds; and the utopia of the first
fifteen hundred years after Christ is transplanted to the
sky, and called the Kingdom of Heaven. It is distinctly
a utopia of escape. The world as men find it
is full of sin and trouble. Nothing can be done about
it except to repent of the sin and find refuge from the
trouble in the life after the grave. So the utopia of
Christianity is fixed and settled: one can enter into the
Kingdom of Heaven if a passport has been granted,
but one can do nothing to create or mold this heaven.
Change and struggle and ambition and amelioration
belong to the wicked world, and bring no final satisfaction.
Happiness lies not in the deed, but in having
a secure credit in the final balance of accounts—happiness,
in other words, lies in the ultimate compensation.
This world of fading empires and dilapidated cities
is no home except for the violent and the “worldly.”
If the idea of utopia loses its practical hold during
this period, the will-to-utopia remains; and the rise of
the monastic system and the attempts of the great popes
from Hildebrand onward to establish a universal empire
under the shield of the church show that, as always,
there was a breach between the ideas which people carried
in their heads and the things which actual circumstances
and going institutions compelled them to do.
There is no need to consider these partial, institutional
utopias until we get down to the nineteenth century.
What concerns us now is that the Kingdom of Heaven,
as a utopia of escape, ceased to hold men’s allegiance
when they discovered other channels and other possibilities.
The shift from a heavenly utopia to a worldly one
came during that period of change and uneasiness which
characterized the decline of the Middle Age. Its first
expression is the “Utopia” of Sir Thomas More, the
great chancellor who served under Henry VIII.
In the introduction to More’s “Utopia” one gets a
vivid impression of the forces that were stirring men’s
minds out of the sluggish routine into which they had
settled. The man who is supposed to describe the
commonwealth of Utopia is a Portuguese scholar,
learned in Greek. He has left his family possessions
with his kinsmen and has gone adventuring for other
continents with Americus Vesputius. This Raphael
Hythloday is the sort of sunburnt sailor one could
probably have encountered in Bristol or Cadiz or Antwerp
almost any day during the late part of the fifteenth
century. He has abandoned Aristotle, whom the
schoolmen had butchered and had made pemmican of,
and through his conquest of Greek he has come into
possession of that new learning which stems back to
Plato; and his brain is teeming with the criticisms and
suggestions of a strange, pagan philosophy. Moreover,
he has been abroad to the Americas or the Indies,
and he is ready to tell all who will listen of a strange
land on the other side of the world, where, as Sterne
said of France, “they do things better.” No institution
is too fantastic but that it might exist—on the
other side of the world. No way of life is too reasonable
but that a philosophical population might follow
it—on the other side of the world. Conceive of the
world of ideas which Greek literature had just opened up
coming headlong against the new lands which the magnetic
compass had given men the courage to explore,
and utopia, as a fresh conception of the good life,
becomes a throbbing possibility.
In setting out for Utopia Sir Thomas More left
behind a scene which in its political violence and economic
maladjustment looks queerly like our own. Indeed,
there are a good many passages which need only
have a few names altered and the language itself cast
into modern English in order to serve as editorial comment
for a radical weekly review.
Consider this man Raphael Hythloday, this errant
member of the intelligentzia. Life as he knows it in the
Europe of his day no longer has a hold upon him. The
rich are fattening upon the poor; land is being gathered
into big parcels, at least in England; and turned over
into sheep runs. The people who used to cultivate the
land are compelled to leave their few acres and are
thrown on their own resources. Soldiers who have returned
from the wars can find nothing to do; disabled
veterans and people accustomed to live as pensioners on
the more prosperous have become destitute. Extravagant
luxury grows on one hand; misery on the other.
Those who are poor, beg; those who are proud, steal;
and for their pains the thieves and the vagrants are
tried and sentenced to the gibbet, where by dozens they
hang before the eyes of the market crowds.
Just as today, people complain that the laws are
not strict enough or that they are not enforced; and
everyone stubbornly refuses to look at the matter
through Raphael Hythloday’s eyes and to see that the
robbery and violence which are abroad are not a cause
of bad times but a result of them.
What can a man of intelligence do in such a world?
More’s friend, Peter Giles, who is represented as the
sponsor for Raphael, wonders why a man of Raphael’s
talent does not enter into the service of the king—in
short, go in for politics. Raphael answers that he
does not wish to be enslaved; and he cannot try to fetch
happiness on terms so abhorrent to his disposition,
for “most princes apply themselves more to the affairs
of war than to the useful arts of peace, and are more
set on acquiring new kingdoms right or wrong than on
governing those they possess.” There is no use trying
to tell them about the wiser institutions of the
Utopians: if they could not refute your arguments they
would say that the old ways were good enough for their
ancestors and are good enough for them, even though
they have willingly let go of all the genuinely good
things that might have been inherited from the past.
So much for the help an intelligent man might give
on domestic problems. As for international affairs, it
is a mess of chicane and intrigue and brigandage.
While so many people of influence are advising preparedness
and “how to carry on the war,” what chance
would a poor intellectual like Hythloday have if he
stood up and said that the government should withdraw
their armies from foreign parts and try to improve
conditions at home, instead of oppressing the people
with taxes and spilling their blood without bringing
them a single blessed advantage, whilst their manners
are being corrupted by a long war, and their laws fall
into contempt, with robbery and murder on every hand.
More, through the tongue of Raphael Hythloday, is
painting a picture of the life he sees about him; but in it
we seem to see every feature of our own national countenance.
This unhonored and disoriented intellectual is the
very emblem of some of our best spirits today. Rack
and ruin have gone too far to admit of any sort of
repair except that which proceeds from the bottom up;
and so Hythloday freely admits that “as long as there
is any property, and while money is the standard of
all other things, I cannot think that a nation can be
governed either justly or happily; not justly, because
the best things will fall to the share of the worst men;
nor happily, because all things will be divided among
a few (and even these are not in all respects happy),
the rest being left to be absolutely miserable.” In
short, says Hythloday, there is no salvation except
through following the practices of the Utopians.
So the new world of exploration brings us within
sight of a new world of ideas, and the beloved community,
whose seed Plato had sought to implant in men’s
minds, springs up again, after a fallow period of almost
two thousand years. What sort of country is it?
Geographically viewed, the island of Utopia exists
only in More’s imagination. All that we can say of it
is that it is two hundred miles broad, shaped something
like a crescent, with an entrance into its great
bay which lends itself to defence. There are fifty-four
cities in the island; the nearest is twenty-four
miles from its neighbor, and the farthest is not more
than a day’s march distant. The chief town, Amaurot,
is situated very nearly in the center; and each city has
jurisdiction over the land for twenty miles around;
so that here again we find the city-region as the unit
of political life.
The economic base of this commonwealth is agriculture,
and no one is ignorant of the art. Here and there
over the countryside are great farm-houses, equipt for
carrying on agricultural operations. While those who
are well-adapted for rural life are free to live in the
open country the whole year round, other workers are
sent by turns from the city to take part in the farm-labor.
Every farmstead or “family” holds no less than
forty men and women. Each year twenty of this family
come back to town after two years in the country; and
in their place another twenty is sent out from the town,
so that they may learn the country work from those
who have had at least a year’s experience.
Agricultural economics is so well advanced that the
countryside knows exactly how much food is needed
by the whole city-region; but the Utopians sow and
breed more abundantly than they need, in order that
their neighbors may have the overplus. Poultry-raising
is also highly advanced. The Utopians “breed an
infinite multitude of chickens in a very curious manner;
for the hens do not sit and hatch them, but vast numbers
of eggs are laid in a gentle and equal heat, in order
to be hatched”—in short, they have discovered the
incubator!
During the harvest season the country magistrates
inform the city magistrates how many extra hands are
needed for reaping; a draft of city workers is made,
and the work is commonly done in short order.
While every man, woman, and child knows how to
cultivate the soil, since each has learned partly in
school and partly by practice, every person also has
some “peculiar trade to which he applies himself, such
as the manufacture of wool or flax, masonry, smith’s
work or carpenter’s work”; and no trade is held in
special esteem above the others. (That is a great jump
from the Republic where the mechanic arts are considered
base and servile in nature!) The same trade
usually passes down from father to son, since each
family follows its own special occupation; but a man
whose genius lies another way may be adopted into a
family which plies another trade; and if after he has
learnt that trade, he wishes still to master another,
this change is brought about in the same manner.
“When he has learned both, he follows that which he
likes best, unless the public has more occasion for the
other.”
The chief and almost the only business of the magistrates
is to see that no one lives in idleness. This does
not mean that the Utopians wear themselves out with
“perpetual toil from morning to night, as if they were
beasts of burden,” for they appoint eight hours for
sleep and six for work, and the rest of the day is left
to each man’s discretion. They are able to cut down
the length of time needed for work, without our so-called
labor saving machinery, by using the services of
classes which in More’s time were given for the most
part to idleness—princes, rich men, healthy beggars,
and the like. The only exception to this rule of labor
is with the magistrates—who are not in the habit of
taking advantage of it—and the students, who upon
proving their ability are released from mechanical operations.
If there is too great a surplus of labor, men
are sent out to repair the highways; but when no
public undertaking is to be performed, the hours of
work are lessened.
So much for the daily industrial life of the Utopians.
How are the goods distributed?
Between the city and the country there is a monthly
exchange of goods. This occasion is made a festival,
and the country people come into town and take back
for themselves the goods which the townspeople have
made; and the magistrates “take care to see it given
to them.” In back of this direct interchange of goods
between town and country, between household and
household, there are doubtless regulations; and it is
simply our misfortune that Raphael Hythloday did not
think it necessary to go into them. Within the cities,
we must add, there are storehouses where a daily market
takes place.
As with the business of production, the family is the
unit of distribution; and the city is composed of these
units, rather than of a multitude of isolated individuals.
“Every city is divided into four equal parts, and in the
middle of each there is a marketplace; what is brought
hither, and manufactured by the several families, is
carried from thence to houses appointed for that purpose,
in which all things of a sort are laid by themselves;
and thither every father goes and takes whatever he
or his family stand in need of, without either paying
for it or leaving anything in exchange. There is no
reason for giving denial to any person, since there is
such plenty of everything among them; and there is no
danger of a man’s asking for more than he needs; they
have no inducements to do this, since they are sure
they shall always be supplied.”
More goes on to explain this direct system of exchange,
and to justify it. “It is the fear of want that
makes any of the whole race of animals either greedy
or ravenous, but besides fear, there is in man a pride
that makes him fancy it a particular glory to excel
others in pomp and excess. But by the laws of the
Utopians there is no room for this. Near these markets
are others for all sorts of provisions, where there
are not only herbs, fruits, and bread, but also fish,
fowl, and cattle. There are also, without their towns,
places appointed near some running water for killing
their beasts, and for washing away their filth.”
In addition to the monthly apportionment of goods
by the local magistrates, the great council which meets
at Amaurot once a year undertakes to examine the
production of each region, and those regions that suffer
from a scarcity of goods are supplied out of the
surplus of other regions, “so that indeed the whole
island is, as it were, one family.”
Taking it all together, there is pretty much the same
standard of well-being that we found in the Republic.
More recognizes the instinct for self-assertion and the
exhibitionist element in man’s makeup; but he does not
pander to it. The precious metals are held in contempt:
gold is used to make chamberpots and chains for
slaves; pearls are given to children who glory in them
and enjoy them while they are young and are as much
ashamed to use them afterwards as they are of their
puppets and other toys. Gaudy clothes and jewelry
are likewise out of fashion in Utopia. The shopkeepers
of Bond Street and Fifth Avenue would break their
hearts here; for it is impossible to spend money or to
spend other people’s labor on articles which lend themselves
solely to conspicuous display, and are otherwise
neither useful nor beautiful. Contrast More’s Utopia
with St. John’s vision of heaven, and the worldly Utopia
seems quite naked and austere. Two hundred years
later, in Penn’s city of Philadelphia, we might have fancied
that we were walking about the streets of Amaurot.
The town life of the Utopians, as I have explained,
rests upon rural foundations; there is such a mixture
of town and country as Peter Kropotkin sought to
realize in his sketch of “Fields, Factories, and Workshops.”
Let us conjure up the town of Amaurot and
see in what sort of environment the townspeople spend
their days. Our Utopian city, alas! reminds us somewhat
of its rivals in latter-day America; for Raphael
tells us that he who knows one of their towns knows
all of them.
Amaurot lies on the side of a hill; it is almost a
square, two miles on each side; and it faces the river
Anider which takes its rise eighty miles above the
town, and gets lost in the ocean sixty miles below. The
town is compassed by a high, thick wall; the streets
are convenient for carriages and sheltered from the
winds; and the houses are built in rows so that a whole
side of the street looks like a single unit. (It was so
that the great people built their houses in eighteenth
century London and Edinburgh, as Belgrave Square,
Charlotte Square, and the great Adelphi Mansion designed
by the Brothers Adam show us.) The streets
are twenty feet broad; and in back of the houses are
gardens, which everyone has a hand in keeping up;
and the people of the various blocks vie with each other
in ordering their gardens, so that there is “nothing
belonging to the whole town that is more useful and
more pleasant.”
In every street there are great halls, distinguished
by particular names, and lying at an equal distance
from each other. In each hall dwells the magistrate
of a district, who rules over thirty families, fifteen living
on one side and fifteen on another; and since a family
consists of not more than sixteen and not less than ten
people, this magistrate—or Philarch as he is called—is
the “community leader” of some four hundred
people.
In these halls everyone meets and takes his principal
meal. The stewards go to the market place at a particular
hour, and, according to the number of people in their
halls, carry home provisions. The people who are in
hospitals—which are built outside the walls and are so
large they might pass for little towns—get the pick of
the day’s food. At the hours of dinner and supper the
whole block is called together by a trumpet, and everybody
joins company, except such as are sick or in hospital,
just as the students and fellows to this day eat
their principal meal in an Oxford college. The dressing
of meat and the ordering of the tables belongs to the
women; all those of every family taking their place by
turns. In the same building there is a common nursery
and chapel; and so the women who have children to care
for labor under no inconvenience.
The midday meal is dispatched unceremoniously; but
at the end of the day music always accompanies the
meals, perfumes are burnt or sprinkled around, and they
“want nothing that may cheer up their spirits.” Bond
Street and Fifth Avenue may weep about the absence of
conspicuous waste in Utopia; but at supper time, at
any rate, William Penn would be uncomfortable. There
is the odor of an uncommonly good club in the description
of the final meal of the day: the smell of the barracks
or the poorhouse, which we should find later in
Robert Owen’s common halls, does not intrude for an
instant. More, when you examine him closely, does not
altogether forget the mean sensual man who dwells occasionally
in all of us!
Now that we have laid the foundations of the material
life, we must observe the limitations that are laid upon
the daily activities of the Utopians. This brings us to
the government.
The basis of the Utopian political state, as in the
economic province, is the family. Every year thirty
families choose a magistrate, known as a Philarch; and
over every ten Philarchs, with the families subject to
them, there is an Archphilarch. All the Philarchs, who
are in number 200, choose the Prince out of a list of
four, who are named by the people of the four divisions
of the city. The Prince is elected for life, unless he be
removed on suspicion of attempting to enslave the
people. The Philarchs are chosen for a single year;
but they are frequently re-elected. In order to keep
their rulers from conspiring to upset the government,
no matter of great importance can be set on foot without
being sent to the Philarchs, “who, after they have
communicated it to the families that belong to their
divisions, and have considered it among themselves,
make report to the senate; and upon great occasions
the matter is referred to the council of the whole
island.”
Recollect that each household is an industrial as well
as a domestic unit, as was usual in the Middle Age, and
you will perceive that this is an astute combination of
industrial and political democracy on a genuine basis
of common interest.
The greater part of the business of the government
relates to the economic life of the people. There are
certain other matters, however, which remain over for
them; and these affairs constitute a blot on More’s
conception of the ideal commonwealth. One of them is
the regulation of travel; another is the treatment of
crime; and a third is war.
It is interesting to note that on two subjects which
More is mightily concerned to rectify in his own country—crime
and war—he establishes conditions which
are pretty far from being ideal or humane in his Utopia.
A. E. has well said that a man becomes the image of
the thing he hates. Everything that Raphael brings
up against the government of England in the Introduction
to Utopia could be brought with almost equal
force, I believe, against the very country which is to
serve as a standard.
While any man may travel if there is no particular
occasion for him at home—whether he wishes to visit
friends or see the rest of the country—it is necessary
for him to carry a passport from the Prince. If he
stay in any place longer than a night he must follow
his proper occupation; and if anyone goes out of the
city without leave or is found wandering around without
a passport, he is punished as a fugitive, and upon
committing the offense a second time is condemned to
slavery. This is a plain example of unimaginative
harshness; and it is hard to explain away; indeed, I
have no intention to.
Apparently More could not conceive of a perfectly
happy commonwealth for the majority of men if they
still had to perform certain filthy daily tasks, like the
slaughtering of beef; and so he attempts to kill two
birds with one stone: he creates a class of slaves, and
he fills this class by condemning to it people who have
committed venial crimes. In doing this, he overlooks
the final objection to slavery in all its forms; namely,
that it tends to corrupt the master.
Since we are discussing the conditions that undermine
More’s commonwealth, we may remark that war,
too, remains; the difference being that the Utopians
attempt to do by strategy, corruption, and what we
should now call propaganda what less intelligent people
do by sheer force of arms. If the Utopian incubator
anticipates the modern invention, their method of conducting
war likewise anticipates our modern technique
of undermining the enemy’s morale: these Utopians, in
the good and the bad, are our contemporaries! Among
the just causes of war the Utopians count the seizure
of territory, the oppression of foreign merchants, and
the denial of access to land to nations capable of cultivating
it. They take considerable pains to keep their
“best sort of men for their own use at home, so they
make use of the worst sort of men for the consumption
of war.” In other words, they regard war as a means,
among other things, of weeding out undesirable elements
in the community.
It is a relief to turn away from these residual
iniquities to marriage and religion!
In marriage there is a curious mixture of the personal
conception of sexual relations, which is the
modern note, with a belief in certain formal specifications
which was the distinctly mediæval quality. Thus
on one hand the Utopians take care that the bride and
the bridegroom are introduced to each other, in their
nakedness, before the ceremony; and the grounds for
divorce are adultery and insufferable perverseness.
When two people cannot agree they are permitted to
escape the bond by mutual agreement under approval
granted by the Senate after strict inquiry. On the
other hand, unchastity is sternly punished, and those
who commit adultery are condemned to slavery and
not given the privilege of a second marriage.
In religion there is complete toleration for all creeds,
with this exception: that those who dispute violently
about religion or attempt to use any other force than
that of mild persuasion are punished for breaking the
public peace.
There is not the space to follow the life of the
Utopians in all its details. It is time to discuss the
world of ideas by which these Utopians chart their
daily activities. This exposition of the basic Utopian
values has been so admirably put by Sir Thomas More
himself that the greater part of our conclusion will
inevitably fall within quotation marks.
The Utopians “define virtue thus: that it is a living
according to Nature, and think that we are made by
God for that end; they believe that a man then follows
Nature when he pursues or avoids things according to
the direction of reason.... Reason directs us
to keep our minds as free from passion and as cheerful
as we can, and that we should consider ourselves bound
by the ties of good-nature and humanity to use our
utmost endeavors to help forward the happiness of all
other persons; for there never was any man such a
morose and severe pursuer of virtue, such an enemy
to pleasure, that though he set hard rules for men
to undergo much pain, many watchings and other
rigors, yet did not at the same time advise them to do
all they could to relieve and ease the miserable, and
who did not represent gentleness and good nature as
amiable dispositions.... A life of pleasure is
either a real evil, and in that case we ought not to
assist others in their pursuit of it, but, on the contrary,
to keep them from it all we can, as from that which is
most hurtful and deadly; or if it is a good thing, so
that we not only may but ought to help others to it,
why then ought not a man to begin with himself? Since
no man can be more bound to look after the good of
another than after his own....
“Thus as they define Virtue to be living according to
Nature, so they imagine that Nature prompts all people
to seek after pleasure, as the end of all they do. They
also observe that in order to further our supporting the
pleasures of life, Nature inclines us to enter into
society; for there is no man so much raised above the
rest of mankind as to be the only favorite of Nature,
who, on the contrary, seems to have placed on a level
all those that belong to the same species. Upon this
they infer that no man ought to seek his own conveniences
so eagerly as to prejudice others; and therefore
they think that all agreements between private persons
ought to be observed, but likewise that all those laws
ought to be kept, which either a good prince has published
in due form, to which a people that is neither
oppressed with tyranny nor circumvented by fraud,
has consented, for distributing these conveniences of
life which afford us all our pleasures.
“They think it is an evidence of true wisdom for a
man to pursue his own advantages, as far as the laws
allow it. They account it piety to prefer public good
to one’s private concerns; but they think it unjust for
a man to seek for pleasure by snatching another man’s
pleasures from him.
“Thus upon an inquiry into the whole matter, they
reckon that all our actions, and even all our virtues,
terminate in pleasure, as in our chief end and greatest
happiness; and they call every motion or state, either
of body or mind, in which Nature teaches us to delight,
a pleasure. They cautiously limit pleasure only to
those appetites to which Nature leads us; for they say
that Nature leads us only to those delights to which
reason as well as sense carries us, and by which we
neither injure any other person nor lose the possession
of greater pleasures, and of such as draw no troubles
after them.”
Thus the Utopians discriminate between natural
pleasures and those which have some sting or bitterness
concealed in them. The love of fine clothes is
considered by Utopians as a pleasure of the latter sort;
likewise is the desire of those who possess fine clothes
to be kowtowed to by other people. Men who heap up
wealth without using it are in the same class; and those
who throw dice or hunt—for in Utopia hunting is
turned over to the butchers, and the butchers are
slaves.
Now Utopians “reckon up several sorts of pleasures
which they call true ones; some belong to the body and
others to the mind. The pleasures of the mind lie in
knowledge, and in that delight which the contemplation
of truth carries with it; to which they add the joyful
reflections on a well-spent life; and the assured hopes
of a future happiness. They divide the pleasures of
the body into two sorts; the one is that which gives our
senses some real delight, and is performed, either by
recruiting nature, and supplying those parts which
feed the internal heat of life by eating and drinking;
or when nature is eased of any surcharge that oppresses
it; when we are relieved from sudden pain, or that which
arises from satisfying the appetite which Nature has
wisely given for the propagation of the species. There
is another kind of pleasure that arises neither from our
receiving what the body requires, nor its being relieved
when overcharged, and yet by a secret, unseen virtue
affects the senses, raises the passions, and strikes the
mind with generous impressions; this is the pleasure
that arises from music. Another kind of bodily
pleasure is that which arises from an undisturbed and
vigorous constitution of body, when life and active
spirits seem to actuate every part. This lively health,
when entirely free from all mixture of pain, of itself
gives an inward pleasure ... and Utopians reckon
it the foundation and basis of all the other joys of life,
since this alone makes the state of life easy and desirable;
and when this is wanting a man is really capable
of no other pleasure.” The crowning pleasure of the
Utopian is the cultivation of the mind; and the leisure
hours of the people, as well as the professional scholars,
are spent in the lecture hall and the study.
Such are the goals for which the Utopians direct
their social order. These values are, I need scarcely
point out, rooted in the nature of man, and not in any
set of external institutions. The aim of every Utopian
institution is to help every man to help himself. When
we put the matter in these bald phrases, what More
brings forward seems weak and platitudinous. Behind
it all, however, is a vital idea: namely, that our attempts
to live the good life are constantly perverted by our
efforts to gain a living; and that by juggling gains and
advantages, by striving after power and riches and
distinction, we miss the opportunity to live as whole
men. People become the nursemaids of their furniture,
their property, their titles, their position; and so they
lose the direct satisfaction that furniture or property
would give.
To cultivate the soil rather than simply to get away
with a job; to take food and drink rather than to earn
money; to think and dream and invent, rather than to
increase one’s reputation; in short, to grasp the living
reality and spurn the shadow—this is the substance
of the Utopian way of life. Power and wealth and
dignity and fame are abstractions; and men cannot live
by abstractions alone. In this Utopia of the New
World every man has the opportunity to be a man
because no one else has the opportunity to be a monster.
Here, too, the chief end of man is that he should
grow to the fullest stature of his species.
CHAPTER FOUR
How the new Humanism of the Renascence brings us
within sight of Christianopolis; and how we have
for the first time a glimpse of a modern utopia.
CHAPTER FOUR — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7 — 8
A hundred years pass, and the man who next conducts
us into Utopia is a Humanist scholar. After
the manner of his time, he answers to the latinized
name, Johann Valentin Andreæ. He is a traveller, a
social reformer, and above all things a preacher; and
so the vision he imparts to us of Christianopolis seems
occasionally to flicker into blackness whilst he moralizes
for us and tells us to the point of tedium what his
views are concerning the life of man, and in particular
the conceptions of Christianity which his countrymen,
the Germans, are debating about. Sometimes, when we
are on the point of coming to grips with his utopia,
he will annoy us by going off on a long tirade about
the wickedness of the world and the necessity for fastening
one’s gaze upon the life hereafter—for Protestantism
seems just as other-worldly as Catholicism. It is
the Humanist Andreæ rather than the Lutheran Andreæ
who paints the picture of a Christian city. While
Andreæ sticks to Christianopolis his insight is deep,
his views are sound, and his proposals are rational;
and more than once he will amaze us by putting forward
ideas which seem to leap three hundred years
ahead of his time and environment.
It is impossible to get rid of the personal flavor of
Andreæ: his fine intelligence and his candor make our
contacts with Christianopolis quite different from the
dreary guidebook sketches which some of the later
utopians will inflict upon us. The two other utopians
who wrote in the same half century as Andreæ—Francis
Bacon and Tommaso Campanella—are quite second-rate
in comparison; Bacon with his positively nauseating
foppishness about details in dress and his superstitious
regard for forms and ceremonials, and Campanella,
the lonely monk whose City of the Sun seems a
marriage of Plato’s Republic and the Court of Montezuma.
When Bacon talks about science, he talks like
a court costumer who is in the habit of describing the
stage properties for a masque; and it is hard to tell
whether he is more interested in the experiments performed
by the scientists of the New Atlantis or the
sort of clothes they wear while engaged in them. There
is nothing of the snob or the dilettante about Andreæ:
His eye fastens itself upon essentials, and he never
leaves them except when—for he is necessarily a man of
his age—he turns his gaze piously to heaven.
This teeming, struggling European world that Andreæ
turns his back upon he knows quite well; for he
has lived in Herrenburg, Koenigsbrunn, Tuebingen,
Strassburg, Heidelberg, Frankfurt, Geneva, Vaihingen,
and Calw; and he is in correspondence with learned men
abroad, in particular with Samuel Hartlib, who lives
in England, and with John Amos Comenius. Like the
Chancellor in Christianopolis, he longs for an “abode
situated below the sky, but at the same time above the
dregs of this known world.” Quite simply, he finds
himself wrecked on the shore of an island dominated by
the city of Christianopolis. After being examined as
to his ideas of life and morals, his person, and his culture,
he is admitted to the community.
This island is a whole world in miniature. As in the
Republic, the unit once more is the valley section, for
the “island is rich in grain and pasture fields, watered
with rivers and brooks, adorned with woods and vineyards,
full of animals.”
In outward appearance, Christianopolis does not
differ very much from the pictures of the cities one
finds in seventeenth century travel books, except for a
unity and orderliness that these cities sometimes lack.
“Its shape is a square whose side is 700 feet, well fortified
with four towers and a wall.... It looks therefore
towards the four quarters of the earth. Of buildings
there are two rows, or if you count the seat of the
government and the storehouses, four; there is only one
public street, and only one marketplace, but this one is
of a very high order.” In the middle of the city there
is a circular temple, a hundred feet in diameter; all the
buildings are three stories; and public balconies lead
to them. Provision against fire is made by building
the houses of burnt stone and separating them by fire-proof
walls. In general, “things look much the same
all around, not extravagant nor yet unclean; fresh air
and ventilation are provided throughout. About four
hundred citizens live here in religious faith and peace
of the highest order.” The whole city is divided into
three parts, one to supply food, one for drill and exercise,
and one for looks. The remainder of the island
serves the purposes of agriculture, and for workshops.
When we look back upon the Republic, with its external
organization so plainly modeled upon military
Sparta, we see the camp and the soldier giving the pattern
to the life of the whole community. In Utopia,
the fundamental unit was the farmstead and the family;
and family discipline, which arises naturally enough in
rural conditions, was transferred to the city. In
Christianopolis, the workshop and the worker set the
lines upon which the community is developed; and whatever
else this society may be, it is a “republic of workers,
living in equality, desiring peace, and renouncing
riches.” If Utopia exhibits the communism of the family,
Christianopolis presents the communism of the
guild.
Industrially speaking, there are three sections in
Christianopolis. One of them is devoted to agriculture
and animal husbandry. Each of these departments has
appropriate buildings, and directly opposite them is a
rather large tower which connects them with the city
buildings; under the tower a broad vaulted entrance
leads into the city, and a smaller one to the individual
houses. The dome of this tower roofs what we should
call a guildhall, and here the citizens of the quarter
come together as often as required to “act on sacred
as well as civil matters.” It is plain that these workers
are not sheep led by wise shepherds, as in the Republic,
but the members of autonomous, self-regulating groups.
The next quarter contains the mills, bake-shops,
meat-shops, and factories for making whatever is done
with machinery apart from fire. As Christianopolis
welcomes originality in invention, there are a variety of
enterprises within this domain; among them, paper
manufacturing plants, saw mills, and establishments
for grinding and polishing arms and tools. There are
common kitchens and wash houses, too; for, as we shall
see presently, life in this ideal city corresponds to
what we experience today in New York, London, and
many another modern industrial city.
The third quarter is given over to the metallurgical
industries, as well as to those like the glass, brick, and
earthenware industries which require constant fire. It
is necessary to point out that in planning the industrial
quarters of Christianopolis, these seventeenth century
Utopians have anticipated the best practice that has
been worked out today, after a century of disorderly
building. The separation of the city into zones, the
distinction between “heavy” industries and “light” industries,
the grouping of similar industrial establishments,
the provision of an agricultural zone adjacent
to the city—in all this our garden cities are but belated
reproductions of Christianopolis.
Moreover, in Christianopolis, there is a conscious
application of science to industrial processes; one
might almost say that these artisans believed in
efficiency engineering; for “here in truth you see a testing
of nature herself. The men are not driven to a
work with which they are unfamiliar, like pack-animals
to their task, but they have been trained before in an
accurate knowledge of scientific matters,” on the theory
that “unless you analyze matter by experiment, unless
you improve the deficiencies of knowledge by more
capable instruments, you are worthless.” The dependence
of industrial improvement upon deliberate scientific
research may be a new discovery for the practical
man, but it is an old story in Utopia.
What is the character of this artisan democracy?
The answer to this is summed up in one of those sayings
that Andreæ, in the midst of his energetic exposition,
drops by the way.
“To be wise and to work are not incompatible, if
there is moderation.”
So it follows that “their artisans are almost entirely
educated men. For that which other people think is
the proper characteristic of a few (and yet if you consider
the stuffing of inexperience by learning, the characteristic
of too many already) this, the inhabitants
argue, should be attained by all individuals. They say
that neither the substance of letters is such, nor yet the
difficulty of work, that one man, if given enough time,
cannot master both.”
“Their work, or as they prefer to hear it called, ‘the
employment of their hands,’ is conducted in a certain
prescribed way, and all things are brought into a public
booth. From here every workman receives out of the
stock on hand whatever is necessary for the work of
the coming week. For the whole city is, as it were, one
single workshop, but of all different sorts and crafts.
The ones in charge of these duties are stationed in the
small towers at the corners of the wall; they know
ahead of time what is to be made, in what quantity, and
of what form, and they inform the mechanics of these
items. If the supply of material in the work booth is
sufficient, the workmen are permitted to indulge and
give free play to their inventive genius. No one has
any money, nor is there any use for any private money;
yet the republic has its own treasury. And in this
respect the inhabitants are especially blessed, because
no one can be superior to the other in the amount of
riches owned, since the advantage is rather one of power
and genius, and the highest respect that of morals and
piety. They have very few working hours, yet no less
is accomplished than in other places, as it is considered
disgraceful by all that one should take more rest and
leisure time than is allowed.”
In addition to the special trades, there are “public
duties to which all citizens have obligation, such as
watching, guarding, harvesting of grain and wine,
working roads, erecting buildings, draining ground;
also certain duties of assisting in the factories which
are imposed upon all in turn according to age and sex,
but not very often nor for a long time. For even
though certain experienced men are put in charge of
all the duties, yet when men are asked for, no one refuses
the state his services and strength. For what we
are in our homes, they are in their city, which they not
undeservedly think a home. And for this reason it is
no disgrace to perform any public function.... Hence
all work, even that which is considered rather irksome,
is accomplished in good time, and without much difficulty,
since the promptness of the great number of
workmen permits them easily to collect or distribute the
great mass of things.”
In this Christianopolis, as Mr. Bertrand Russell
would put it, the creative rather than the possessive
impulses are uppermost. Work is the main condition
of existence, and this good community faces it. It is a
pretty contrast to the attitude of the leisured classes
who, as Andreæ says, with an entirely mistaken sense
of delicacy shrink from touching earth, water, stones,
coal, and things of that sort, but think it grand to
have in their possession to delight them “horses, dogs,
harlots and other similar creatures.”
The place of commerce in this scheme of life is simple.
It does not exist for the sake of individual gain. Hence
no one engages in commerce on his own hook, for such
matters are put in the hands of “those selected to attend
to them,” and the aim of commerce is not to gain money
but to increase the variety of things at the disposal of
the local community; so that—and again Andreæ steps
in for emphasis—“we may see the peculiar production
of each land, and so communicate with each other that
we may seem to have the advantages of the universe in
one place, as it were.”
The constitution of the family in Christianopolis
follows pretty definitely upon the lines dictated by
urban occupations; for Andreæ is a city man, and since
he does not despise the advantages city life can give, he
does not shrink from their consequences. One of these
consequences is, surely, the restriction of domesticity,
or rather, the projection in the city at large of the
functions that in a farmstead would be carried on
within the bosom of the family.
When a lad is twenty-four and a lass is eighteen, they
are permitted to marry, with the benefit of Christian
rites and services, and a decorous avoidance of drunkenness
and gluttony after the ceremony. Marriage is a
simple matter. There are no dowries to consider, no
professional anxieties to face, no housing shortage to
keep one from finding a home, and above all, perhaps,
no landlord to propitiate with money, since all houses
are owned by the city and are granted and assigned to
individuals for their use. Virtue and beauty are the
only qualities that govern a marriage in Christianopolis.
Furniture is provided with the house out of
the public store. If in Utopia the families are grouped
together in a patriarchal household, such as More himself
maintained at Chelsea, in Christianopolis they consist
of isolated couples, four, at most six people in all,
a woman, a man, and such children as are not yet of
school age.
Let us visit a young couple in Christianopolis. We
reach the house by way of a street, twenty feet broad,
faced by houses with a wide frontage on the street, some
forty feet in length, and of from fifteen to twenty-five
feet in depth. In our crowded towns, today, where
people pay for land by the front foot, the frontage is
narrow and the houses are deep; and as a result there is
a dreadful insufficiency of light and air; but in Christianopolis,
as in some of the older European towns, the
houses are built to get a maximum of air and sunlight.
If it is raining when we make our visit, a covered walk,
five feet wide, supported by columns twelve feet high,
will shelter us from the rain.
Our friends live, we shall say, in one of the average
apartments; so they have three rooms, a bathroom, a
sleeping apartment, and a kitchen. “The middle part
within the tower has a little open space with a wide
window, where wood and the heavier things are raised
aloft by pulleys”—in short, a dumbwaiter. Looking
out from the window in the rear, we face a well-kept
garden; and if our host is inclined to give us wine, he
may let us take our pick from among the cobwebs of a
small private cellar in the basement, where such things
are kept. If it is a cold day, the furnace is going; or
if we happen to make our visit in the summer time, the
awnings are drawn.
Our host makes apologies, perhaps, for a litter of
wood and shavings that occupies a corner of the
kitchen, for he has just been putting up a few shelves
in his spare time, and has borrowed a kit of tools from
the public supply house. (Since he is not a carpenter,
he has no need for these tools the rest of the year; and
other people can have their turn at them.) Coming
from Utopia, one of the things that strikes us is the
absence of domestic attendance; and when we ask our
hostess about it, she tells us that she will not have anyone
to wait upon her until she is confined.
“But isn’t there a lot of work for you to do all by
yourself?” we shall ask.
“Not for anybody with a college training,” she will
answer. “You see that our furnishings are quite simple;
and since there are no gimcracks to be dusted, no
polished tables to be oiled, no carpets to be swept, and
nothing in our apartment that is just for show to prove
that we can afford to live better than our neighbors,
the work is scarcely more than enough to keep one in
good health and temper. Of course, cooking meals
is always something of a nuisance; and washing up is
worse. But my husband and I share the work together,
in everything but sewing and washing clothes, and you
would be surprised how quickly everything gets done.
Work is usually galling when somebody else is taking
his ease while one is doing it; but where husband and
wife share alike, as in Christianopolis, there is really
nothing to it. If you’ll stay to dinner, you’ll find out
how easily it goes. Since you haven’t brought your
rations, my husband will get some cooked meats in the
public kitchen, and that will do for all of us.”
“No one need be surprised at the rather cramped
quarters,” Andreæ hastens to interject. “People who
house vanity ... can never live spaciously enough.
They burden others and are burdened themselves, and
no one measures their necessities, nay even their comforts,
easily otherwise than by an unbearable and unmovable
mass. Oh, only those persons are rich who
have all of which they have real need, who admit nothing
else, merely because it is possible to have it in
abundance.”
Carried to its extreme, you will find this philosophy
put once for all in Thoreau’s Walden. We have got
our bearings in Utopia, I believe, when we have determined
what a life abundant consists of, and what will
suffice for it.
Suppose that our friends have children. During the
early years of their life they are in the care of their
mother. When they have completed their sixth year,
the children are given over to the care of the community,
and both sexes continue in school through the
stages of childhood, youth, and early maturity. “No
parent gives closer or more careful attention to his
children than is given here, for the most upright preceptors,
men as well as women, are placed over them.
Moreover,” the parents “can visit their children, even
unseen by them, as often as they have leisure. As this
is an institution for the public good, it is managed
agreeably as a common charge for all the citizens.
They see to it that the food is appetizing and wholesome,
that the couches and beds are clean and comfortable,
and that the clothes and attire of the whole
body are clean.... If diseases of the skin or body are
contracted, the individuals are cared for in good time;
and to avoid the spreading of infection, they are
quarantined.”
There is scarcely need to examine the program of
study except in its broad outlines. It is enough to
observe that “the young men have their study period in
the morning, the girls in the afternoon, and matrons
as well as learned men are their instructors.... The
rest of their time is devoted to manual training and
domestic art and science, as each one’s occupation is
assigned to his natural inclination. When they have
vacant time they are permitted to engage in honorable
physical exercises either in the open spaces of the town
or in the field.”
Two points, however, deserve our attention. The
first is that the school is run as a miniature republic.
The second is the calibre of the instructors. “The instructors,”
says our zealous humanist, “are not men
from the dregs of human society nor such as are useless
for other occupations, but the choice of all the
citizens, persons whose standing in the Republic is
known and who very often have access to the highest
positions of the state.”
The last phrase again transports me back to the
modern world. I see this fine humanist ideal budding
in another place. This time it is a summer school in
the hills of New Hampshire, where the children govern
themselves in the classroom, where there is no punishment
except temporary exclusion from the group, and
where, above all, each instructor is chosen because of
his creative practice in the subject which he teaches: a
highly gifted composer teaches music, an athlete teaches
gymnastics, a poet teaches literature. Then I think
of all the casual and wasted talents of people who for
little more than the asking would share their love of
the arts and sciences with little children, if only those
who are in charge of little children were not too blind
or too fearful to make use of them. Faraday’s classic
lectures on the physics of the candle, and Ruskin’s
addresses to a young ladies’ boarding school on the
function of literature—such things might be multiplied.
It is not the creation of this utopian method that is
difficult; for the thing has already been done: what we
need is its extension. Then children might come to
school as gaily as they do in Peterborough, N. H., on
the lush summer mornings; and people would not turn
their backs on learning any more than they would turn
their backs on life. If anyone thinks that Johann
Andreæ’s prescription for a teaching staff is an impossible
one, let him visit the Peterborough School, and
examine its records and achievements.
It remains to record the further stages of learning.
The halls of the central citadel are divided into twelve
departments, and except for the armory, the archives,
the printing establishment, and the treasury, these halls
are devoted entirely to the arts and sciences.
There is, to begin with, a laboratory of physical
science. “Here the properties of metals, minerals, and
vegetables, and even the life of animals, are examined,
purified, increased, and united for the use of the human
race and in the interests of health.... Here men learn
to regulate fire, make use of air, value the water, and
test the earth.”
Next to this laboratory is a Drug Supply House,
where a pharmacy is scientifically developed, for the
curing of physical disease, and adjoining this is a school
of medicine, or as Andreæ reports, “a place given over
to anatomy.... The value of ascertaining the location
of the organs and of assisting the struggles of nature
no one would deny, unless he be as ignorant of himself
as are the barbarians.... The inhabitants of Christianopolis
teach their youth the operations of life and
the various organs, from the parts of the physical
body.”
We come now then to a Natural Science laboratory
which is in effect a Museum of Natural History, an
institution founded in Utopia a century and a half
before a partial and inadequate substitute—a mere extension
of the curio chamber of a Country House—was
presented to an admiring world as the British Museum.
“This,” as Andreæ says, “cannot be too elegantly described,”
and I heartily agree with him; for he paints
the picture of a museum which the American Museum
at New York or South Kensington in London has only
begun to realize within the last decade or two of their
existence.
“Natural history is here seen painted on the walls in
detail, and with greatest skill. The phenomena of the
sky, views of the earth in different regions, the different
races of men, representations of animals, the forms of
growing things, classes of stones and gems, are not only
on hand and named, but they even teach and make
known their nature and qualities.... Truly is not
recognition of things of the earth much easier of competent
demonstration if illustrative materials are at
hand and if there is some guide to the memory? For
instruction enters altogether more easily through the
eyes than through the ears, and much more pleasantly
in the presence of refinement than among the base.
They are deceived who think it is impossible to teach
except in dark caves and with a gloomy brow. A liberal
minded man is never so keen as when he has his instructors
on confidential terms.”
Going farther, we find a mathematics laboratory and
a department of mathematical instruments. The first
is “remarkable for its diagrams of the heavens, as the
hall of physics for its diagrams of the earth.... A
chart of the star-studded heavens and a reproduction
of the whole shining host above were shown,” ... and
also “different illustrations representing tools and
machines, small models, figures of geometry; instruments
of the mechanical arts, drawn, named, and explained.”
I cannot help expressing my admiration here
for the concrete imagination of this remarkable scholar:
he deliberately anticipated, not in the vague, allegorical
form that Bacon does, but as lucidly as an architect
or a museum curator, the sort of institute which South
Kensington, with its Departments of Physical and
Natural Science, or perhaps the Smithsonian in America,
has just begun to resemble. If our museums had
begun with the ideal Andreæ had in mind, instead of
with the miscellaneous rubbish which was the nucleus of
their collections—and still remains the nucleus in many
of the less advanced institutions—the presentation of
the sciences would be a more adequate thing than it is.
Does Andreæ leave the fine arts out of his picture?
By no means. “Opposite the pharmacy is a very roomy
shop for pictorial art, an art in which the city takes
the greatest delight. For the city, besides being decorated
all over with pictures representing the various
phases of the earth, makes use of them especially in
the instruction of youth and for rendering learning
more easy.... Besides, pictures and statues of
famous men are to be seen everywhere, an incentive
of no mean value to the young for striving to imitate
their virtue.... At the same time also, the beauty of
forms is so pleasing to them that they embrace with a
whole heart the inner beauty of virtue itself.”
At the summit of art and science we naturally find
in Christianopolis the temple of religion. Alas! the
hand of Calvin has been busy in Christianopolis—recollect
that Andreæ once lived in Geneva and admired its
ordinances—and attendance at prayers is compulsory.
In order to get an idea of this great circular temple,
three hundred sixteen feet in circumference and seventy
feet high, we must think of a colossal moving picture
theater in a modern metropolis. The comparison is not
essentially sacrilegious; and I believe that those who
will take the trouble to look below the surface will find
without difficulty the common denominator between the
profane and the ecclesiastical institution. (Attendance
at motion pictures, I must quickly add for the benefit
of the future historian, has not yet been made compulsory
in the modern metropolis.)
One-half of the temple is where the public gatherings
take place; and the other is reserved for the distribution
of the sacraments and for music. “At the same time,
the sacred comedies, by which they set so much store,
and are entertained every three months, are shown in
the temple.”
We have discussed folk, work, and place in Christianopolis;
and we have dealt in an admittedly sketchy
fashion with culture and art. We must now turn attention
to the polity; and here we must note that Andreæ’s
description shifts for once to an allegorical plane, and
departs not a little from the realism of his treatment
of science and the arts.
At the bottom of the polity there are glimpses of a
local industrial association, meeting in the common
halls that are provided in the towers of each of the
industrial quarters; and we gather that to represent
the city at large twenty-four councilmen are chosen,
while as the executive department there is a triumvirate
consisting of a Minister, a Judge, and a Director of
Learning, each of whom is married, for metaphorical
point, to Conscience, Understanding, and Truth, respectively.
“Each one of the leaders does his own duty,
yet not without the knowledge of others; all consult
together in matters that concern the safety of the
state.”
In the censorship of books, Christianopolis reminds
us of the Republic; in the exclusion of lawyers it calls
up nearly every other utopia; and in its attitude
towards crime it has a temperance and leniency that is
all its own, for “the judges of this Christian city observe
this custom especially, that they punish most
severely those misdeeds which are directed straight
against God, less severely those which injure men, and
lightest of all those who harm only property. As the
Christian citizens are always chary of spilling blood,
they do not willingly agree upon the death sentence as
a form of punishment.... For anyone can destroy a
man but only the best can reform.”
How shall we sum up this government? Let Andreæ
speak his own words; for he has reached the innermost
shrine of Christianopolis and perceives the center of
activity in the state.
“Here religion, justice, and learning have their
abode, and theirs is the control of the city.... I often
wonder what people mean who separate and disjoint
their best powers, the joining of which might render
them blessed as far as may be on earth. There are those
who would be considered religious, who throw off all
things human; there are some who are pleased to rule,
though without any religion at all; learning makes a
great noise, flattering now this one, now that, yet applauding
itself most. What finally may the tongue do
except provoke God, confuse men, and destroy itself?
So there would seem to be a need of co-operation which
only Christianity can give—Christianity which conciliates
God with men and unites men together, so that
they have pious thoughts, do good deeds, know the
truth, and finally die happily to live eternally.”
There are some who might object to this statement
on the ground that it smacked too heartily of supernatural
religion; but it remains just as valid if we
translate it into terms whose theological reactions have
been neutralized. To have a sense of values, to know
the world in which they are set, and to be able to distribute
them—this is our modern version of Andreæ’s
conception of religion, learning, and justice. A little
search might uncover another expression of the Humanist
ideal as complete and magnificent as this; but I
doubt if it would find a better one. In essence, this
blunt and forthright German scholar is standing
shoulder to shoulder with Plato: his Christianopolis is
as enduring as the best nature of men.
CHAPTER FIVE
How Bacon and Campanella, who have a great reputation
as utopians, are little better than echoes of
the men who went before them.
CHAPTER FIVE — 1 — 2
A Genoese sea-captain is the guest of a Grand
Master of the Knights Hospitaller. This sea-captain
tells him of a great country under the equator, dominated
by the City of the Sun. The outward appearance
of this country is a little strange—the city with its
seven rings named after the seven planets, and its four
gates that lead to the four quarters of the earth, and
the hill that is topt by a grand temple, and the walls
covered with laws and alphabets and paintings of natural
phenomena, and the Rulers—Power, Wisdom, and
Love—with the learned doctors, Astrologus, Cosmographus,
Arithmeticus, and their like: it is an apparition
such as never yet was seen on land or sea. Small
wonder, for this City of the Sun existed only in the
exotic brain of a Calabrian monk, Tommaso Campanella,
whose Utopia existed in manuscript before
Andreæ wrote his Christianopolis.
We shall not stay long in the City of the Sun. After
we have become familiar with the outward color and
form of the landscape, we discover, alas! that it is not
a foreign country we are exploring, but a sort of picture
puzzle put together out of fragments from Plato
and More. As in the Republic, there is a complete
community of property, a community of wives, and an
equality of the sexes; as in Utopia, the younger people
wait upon the elders; as in Christianopolis, science is
imparted, or at least hinted at, by demonstration.
When one subtracts what these other Utopian countries
have contributed, very little indeed remains.
But we must not neglect to observe two significant
passages. One of them is the recognition of the part
that invention might play in the ideal commonwealth.
The people of the City of the Sun have wagons that are
driven by the wind, and boats “which go over the waters
without rowers or the force of the wind, but by a marvelous
contrivance.” There is a very clear anticipation
of the mechanical improvements which began to multiply
so rapidly in the eighteenth century. At the tale
end of the sea-captain’s recital, the Grand Master exclaims:
“Oh, if you knew what our astrologers say of
the coming age, that has in it more history within a
hundred years than all the world had in four thousand
years before! Of the wonderful invention of printing
and guns, and the use of the magnet....” With the
mechanical arts in full development, labor in the City
of the Sun has become dignified: it is not the custom to
keep slaves. Since everyone takes his part in the common
work, there is not more than four hours’ work to
be done per day. “They are rich because they want
nothing; poor because they possess nothing; and consequently
they are not slaves to circumstances, but
circumstances serve them.”
The other point upon which Campanella’s observation
is remarkably keen is his explanation of the relation
of private property and the private household to
the commonwealth. Thus:
“They say that all private property is acquired and
improved for the reason that each one of us by himself
has his own home and wife and children. From this
self-love springs. For when we raise a son to riches
and dignities, and leave an heir to much wealth, we
become either ready to grasp at the property of the
state, if in any case fear should be removed from the
power which belongs to riches and rank; or avaricious,
crafty, and hypocritical, if any is of slender purse,
little strength, and mean ancestry. But when we have
taken away self-love, there remains only love for the
state.”
How shall the common Utopia keep from being neglected
through each one’s concern for his little private
utopia?
This is the critical problem that our utopians have
all to face; and Campanella loyally follows Plato in his
solution. It is perhaps inevitable that each utopian’s
personal experience of life should enter into his solution,
and overwhelmingly give it color; and here the
limitations of our utopians are plain. More and
Andreæ are married men, and they stand for the individual
family. Plato and Campanella were bachelors,
and they proposed that men should live like monks or
soldiers. Perhaps these two camps are not so far away
as they would seem. If we follow the exposition of that
excellent anthropologist, Professor Edward Westermarck,
we shall be fairly well convinced, I believe, that
marriage is a biological institution, and thorough promiscuity
is, to say the least, an unusual form of mating.
Plato perhaps recognized this when he left us in doubt
as to whether a community of wives would be practiced
by his artisans and husbandmen. So he perhaps paves
the way for a solution by which the normal life for the
great majority of men would be marriage, with its individual
concerns and loyalties, whilst for the active,
creative elements in the community a less secluded form
of mating would be practiced. The painter, Van Gogh,
has given us a kernel to chew on when he says that the
sexual life of the artist must be either that of the monk
or the soldier, for otherwise he is distracted from his
creative work.
We may leave this question in the air, as long as we
realize that all our utopias rest upon our ability to discover
some sort of a solution.
Francis Bacon’s New Atlantis is not a utopia in the
sense that I have explained our principle of selection in
the preface to the bibliography. It is only a fragment,
and not very good as fragments go; and it would drop
out altogether from our survey were it not for the
hugely over-rated reputation that Bacon has as a
philosopher of natural science—indeed, as the philosopher
after Aristotle.
The greater part of Bacon’s ideas are anticipated
and more amply expressed by Andreæ. When we have
deleted Bacon’s multitudinous prayers and exhortations,
when we have disposed of his copious descriptions
of jewels and velvets and satins and ceremonial regalia,
we find that the core of his commonwealth is Salomon’s
House, sometimes known as the College of the Six Days’
Works; which he describes as the noblest foundation
that ever was upon earth, and the lantern of the
kingdom.
The purpose of this foundation is the “knowledge of
the causes and secret motions of things; and the enlarging
of the bounds of human empire, to the effecting of
all things possible.” The material resources of this
foundation are manifold. It has laboratories dug into
the sides of hills, and observatories with towers half a
mile high; it has great lakes of salt and fresh water
which seem to anticipate the marine laboratories we
know today; and it has engines for setting things in
motion. Besides this, there are spacious houses where
physical demonstrations are made, and sanatoria where
various novel cures are attempted; there are experimental
agricultural stations, too, where grafts and
crosses are tried. Add to this pharmaceutical laboratories,
industrial laboratories, and numerous houses
devoted to such things as experiments with sounds,
lights, perfumes, and tastes—which Bacon presents in
a wild farrago without any regard to the essential
sciences to which the work he describes is related—and
one has a tally of the “riches of Salomon’s House.”
Twelve fellows of the college travel into foreign lands
to bring back books and abstracts, and reports on
experiments and inventions. Three make a digest
of experiments. Three collect the experiments of all
the mechanical arts, and also of practices which are not
brought into the arts. Three try new experiments.
Three devote themselves to classifications; and another
three, known as dowry men or benefactors, look into
the experiments of their fellows and cast about for
means of applying them to human life and knowledge.
Three fellows consult with the whole body of scientific
workers and plan new channels of investigation; and
three, who are called interpreters of nature, attempt to
raise the results of particular investigations into
general observations and axioms.
In telling all this, as in the rest of his New Atlantis,
Bacon is incredibly childish and incoherent: he gives
such a description of Salomon’s House as a six-year-old
schoolboy might give of a visit to the Rockefeller
Foundation. Beneath these maladroit interpretations,
however, we see that Bacon had a grasp on some of the
fundamentals of scientific research, and of the part that
science might play in the “relief of man’s estate.” It
is nothing more than a hint, this New Atlantis; but a
word to the wise is enough; and as we look about the
modern world we see that, in its material affairs at any
rate, the great scientific institutes and foundations—the
United States Bureau of Standards, for one—play
a part not a little like that of the College of the Six
Days’ Works.
Campanella with his dream of powerful mechanical
inventions, in which he had been anticipated by
Leonardo, and Bacon with his sketch of scientific institutes—with
these two utopians we stand at the entrance
to the utopia of means; that is to say, the place in
which all that materially contributes to the good life
has been perfected. The earlier utopias were concerned
to establish the things which men should aim for in life.
The utopias of the later Renascence took these aims
for granted and discussed how man’s scope of action
might be broadened. In this the utopians only reflected
the temper of their time; and did not attempt to remold
it. As a result of our preoccupation with the means,
we in the Western World live in an inventor’s paradise.
Scientific knowledge and mechanical power we have to
burn; more knowledge and more power than Bacon or
Campanella could possibly have dreamed of. But today
we face again the riddle that Plato, More, and
Andreæ sought to answer: what are men to do with their
knowledge and power?
As we skip here and there through the Utopias of the
next three centuries, this question gets more deeply
impregnated in our minds.
CHAPTER SIX
How something happened in the eighteenth century
which made men “furiously to think,” and how a
whole group of utopias sprang out of the upturned
soil of industrialism.
CHAPTER SIX — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6
There is a gap in the Utopian tradition between the
seventeenth century and the nineteenth. Utopia, the
place that must be built, faded into no-man’s land,
the spot to which one might escape; and the utopias of
Denis Vairasse and Simon Berington and the other
romancers of this in-between period are in the line of
Robinson Crusoe rather than the Republic.
One finds the clue to this lapse in Tiphaigne de la
Roche’s Giphantia, a sketch of what was and what is
and what will be, and in particular, an inquiry into the
“Babylonian” mode of life. The author of Giphantia
tells a parable about Sophia, the incarnation of Wisdom,
who rejects the offers of the spendthrift, the
merchant, the soldier, and the student, and accepts
the suit of a diffident fellow who had retired in solitude
to the country, to spend his days like a cultivated
gentleman. One remembers the way in which Montaigne
spent his declining years; one remembers Voltaire; and
one sees how deeply the ideal of Robinson Crusoe—a
cultivated Robinson Crusoe, surrounded with books
and beyond the reach of any king and court—colored
the deepest aspirations of this period. Rousseau, writing
about the corrupting influence of the arts and
sciences, and Chateaubriand, seeking the noble savage
in the American wilderness and finding him in his own
bosom—these men struck the dominating note of the
eighteenth century. In a society that was already
painfully artificial and “arranged” the institutes of
Lycurgus and Utopus must have seemed as repressive
as those of Louis XIV. So almost two centuries pass
before we find any fresh regions to explore in Utopia.
The Utopia of Sir Thomas More, and those of the
later men of the Renascence, arose, as I have pointed
out, from the contrast between the possibilities that lay
open beyond the sea and the dismal conditions that
attended the breakdown of the town economy of the
Middle Age. Like Plato’s Republic, it attempted to
face the difficult problem of transition.
In the course of the next three centuries the adventure
of exploring and ransacking strange countries
loses its hold upon men’s imagination; and a new type
of activity becomes the center of interest. The conquest
of alien countries and the lure of gold do not
indeed die out with this new interest; but they are
subordinated to another type of conquest—that which
man seeks to effect over nature. Here and there, particularly
in Great Britain, untrained men “with a practical
turn” begin to busy themselves with improving
the mechanical apparatus by which the day’s labor is
done. A retired barber, named Arkwright, invents a
spinning frame, a Scotchman named MacAdam discovers
a new method of laying roads; and out of
a hundred such inventions during the late eighteenth
and early nineteenth centuries a new world comes
into existence—a world in which energy derived from
coal and running water takes the place of human
energy; in which goods manipulated by machinery
take the place of goods woven or sawed or hammered
by hand. Within a hundred years the actual world
and the idola were transformed.
In this new world of falling water, burning coal, and
whirring machinery, utopia was born again. It is easy
to see why this should have happened, and why about
two-thirds of our utopias should have been written
in the nineteenth century. The world was being visibly
made over; and it was possible to conceive of a different
order of things without escaping to the other side of
the earth. There were political changes, and the monarchic
state was tempered by republicanism; there were
industrial changes, and two hungry mouths were born
where one could feed before; and there were social
changes—the strata of society shifted and “faulted,”
and men who in an earlier period would have been
doomed to a dull and ignominious round, perhaps,
took a place alongside those whom inheritance had
given all the privileges of riches and breeding.
In contrast to all these fresh possibilities were the
dismal realities which were easily enough perceived by
people who stood outside this new order, or who by
temperament revolted against the indignities and repressions
and vilenesses that accompanied it. It is
not my particular business here to deal with the facts
of history; but unless one understands the facts of
history, the utopias which I am about to present lose
a good part of their meaning. Those machines whose
output was so great that all men might be clothed;
those new methods of agriculture and new agricultural
implements, which promised crops so big that all men
might be fed—the very instruments that were to give
the whole community the physical basis of a good life
turned out, for the vast majority of people who possessed
neither capital nor land, to be nothing short of
instruments of torture.
I do not speak too harshly of the early industrial
age; it is impossible to speak too harshly. Take the
trouble to read Robert Owen’s “Essay on the Formation
of Character” (Manchester: 1837) and learn
what conditions were like in a model factory run by
an enlightened employer: it is a picture of unmitigated
brutality. One must go back to the blackest periods
of ancient slavery for a parallel, if indeed one would
find it, for the Pyramids that were built under the lash
have a certain grandeur and permanence which justify
their existence, whilst the goods which were produced
in Yorkshire through the maimed bodies of pauper
children proved to be as impermanent as the lives that
were sacrificed in making them.
Those who were inside this new order—the Gradgrinds
and Bounderbys whom Dickens pictures in
“Hard Times”—sought to realize their utopia of the
Iron Age on earth. When we are through with the
genuine utopians we shall examine the idola by which
all the “practical” men of the nineteenth century, Marx
as well as Macaulay, patterned their behavior. Those
who stood out against this new order were not so much
opposed to the new methods as to the purposes for
which they were being used: they felt that an orderly
conquest of Nature had turned into a wild scramble
for loot, and that all the goods industrialism promised
were being lost, for the benefit of a few aggressive and
unsocialized individuals. With the host of critics and
interpreters and reformers that arose in the nineteenth
century we shall have a little reckoning to make presently:
those who concern us here however belong to the
stock of Plato, More, and Andreæ, in that they attempted
to see society as a whole, and to protect a
new order which would be basically sound as well as
superficially improved. Yet with the exception of the
utopias which revolted against industrialism these
nineteenth century essays are partial and one-sided;
for they tend to magnify the importance of the industrial
order as much as Gradgrind and Bounderby did,
and in doing this they lose sight of the whole life of
man. These industrial utopias are no longer concerned
with values but with means; they are all instrumentalist.
I doubt whether an intelligent peasant in India
or China would get out of the whole batch of these
utopias a single idea which would have any bearing on
the life that he has experienced—so little of human
significance remains when the problems of mechanical
and political organization have been disposed of!
One symptom of this lack of individuality, this lack
of what, in the old-fashioned sense used to be called a
philosophy, is the fact that we can treat all these industrial
utopias in groups. The first of these group-utopias
I shall call, perhaps somewhat arbitrarily, the
Associationists.
Among the Associationists, the most influential
utopian is Charles François Marie Fourier. He was
a prolific and incoherent writer, and his Utopia, if the
truth be told, exists as disjecta membra rather than as
a single work; but in his case I make an exception to
the criterion of selection; because in every other respect
he has a claim upon our attention. This Fourier was a
dry little French commercial traveller, whose personal
fortune was lost in the French revolution and whose
hopes for founding a real eutopia were blasted by the
July revolution of 1830. Again and again he transferred
himself from one line of goods to another in
order to increase the area of the territory he covered
and learn more of the workings of society; and so in
his writings a wealth of concrete detail goes hand in
hand with personal crotchets and the opinionativeness
which arises almost inevitably out of an undisciplined
solitude. What follows is a distillation of Fourier’s
thought, with the lees and orts left in the bottom of the
flask.
Fourier differs largely from the early utopians
in that he is concerned first of all not with modifying
human nature but with finding out what it actually is.
His utopia is to be based upon an understanding of
man’s actual physical and mental makeup, and its institutions
are to be such as will permit man’s original
nature to function freely. The motive which draws
his community together is attraction; the power which
sets his institutions going is “the passions.” Under the
head of passions—the original biological equipment—Fourier
gives a list of tendencies which corresponds
roughly with the modern psychologist’s list of instincts.
Fourier takes these passions as “given”; his utopia
is not designed to “effect any change in our passions
... their direction will be changed without
changing their nature.” As Brisbane says in his Introduction
to Fourier’s philosophy, social institutions
are to these passional forces what machinery is to material
forces. A good community, according to
Fourier, is one which will bring all these passions into
play, in their complex actions and interactions.
As in the Republic, the ideal behind Fourier’s utopia
is harmony; for man has a threefold destiny; namely,
“an industrial destiny, to harmonize the material world;
a social destiny, to harmonize the passional or moral
world; and an intellectual destiny, to discover the laws
of universal order and harmony.” What was at fault
with modern civilized societies was that they were incomplete,
and in their functioning they created a social
dissonance. To overcome this, says Fourier, men must
unite into harmonious associations which will give play
to all their activities, and which, by erecting common
institutions, will do away with the waste arising in
the individual’s attempts to do for himself all the things
which would be done by a complete community.
For this perfect association Fourier provides minute
plans and tables; but the general plan can be outlined
with brevity.
First of all, Fourier, too, goes back to the valley
section. The initial nucleus of his utopia is to consist
of a company of 1,500 or 1,600 persons, owning a good
stretch of land comprising at least a square league.
Since this experimental phalanx, as Fourier called it,
would have to stand alone, and without the support
of neighboring phalanxes, there will in consequence of
this isolation be many gaps in “attraction,” and “many
passional calms to dread in its workings.” To overcome
this, Fourier insists that it is necessary to locate the
phalanx on soil fit for a variety of functions. “A flat
country, such as Antwerp, Leipsic, Orleans, would be
totally unsuitable ... owing to the uniformity of
land surface. It will therefore be necessary to select
a diversified region, like the surroundings of Lausanne,
or at the very least, a fine valley, provided with a stream
of water and a forest, like the valley of Brussel or of
Halle.”
This domain would be laid out in fields, orchards,
vineyards, and so forth, according to the nature of the
soil and industrial requirements. By devotion to horticulture
and arboriculture, Fourier figures, an intensive
development would supply abundantly the needs of the
colony. The main economic occupation of the phalanx
would be agricultural—this is perhaps the great distinction
between Fourier and later Utopians—but all
the arts would be practiced within the phalanstery,
since otherwise the association would be incomplete.
The principle of the association is concretely embodied
in a vast edifice in the center of the domain:
“a palace complete in all its appointments serving as
the residence of the associates. In this palace there
are three wings, corresponding to the Material, the
Social, and the Intellectual domains. In one wing are
the workshops and halls of industry. In another are
the library, the scientific collections, museums, artists’
studios, and the like. In the center, devoted to the
social element, are banquet halls, a hall of reception,
and grand salons. At one end of the palace is a Temple
of the Material Harmonies, devoted to singing, music,
poetry, dancing, gymnastics, painting, and so forth.
At the other end is the Temple of Unityism, to celebrate
with appropriate rites man’s unity with the universe.
On the summit there is an observatory with
telegraph and signal tower, for communication with
other phalanxes.
The phalanx men are associationists; but it follows
from Fourier’s theory of the passions that they have
private interests as well as public ones; and these
private interests are permitted to flourish as long as
they do not interfere with social solidarity. Thus they
avoid the waste inherent in private housekeeping by
having public kitchens, where, incidentally, the children
are trained from an early age at cooking, as they are
today in one or two experimental schools: nevertheless
it is possible to dine in solitude as well as in company.
By the same token, every member of the phalanx is
guaranteed a minimum of food, clothing, lodging, and
even amusements without respect to work; at the same
time, private property is sanctioned, and each member
extracts from the common store a dividend in proportion
to the amount of stock he holds in the association.
This dividend, it must be qualified, is considerably reduced
by the fact that a system of profit sharing replaces
the pure wage system. There is thus a sort of
balance between private self-seeking and the maintenance
of the public good.
In order to manufacture goods economically, large
scale production is introduced wherever possible, and
the division of labor is forced to its ultimate limits.
Fourier takes account of the resulting monotony, however,
and suggests that the monotony be corrected by
having recourse to changing tasks and occupations
from time to time. In commercial exchange, the
phalanx acts as a unit; it constitutes a great self-governing
body which traffics in surplus goods with
similar associations, without any middleman, in something
of the manner, perhaps, that the Co-operative
Wholesale Societies do today.
By abolishing the individual household, the phalanx
gives a new freedom to women; and Fourier does not
see how it is possible to maintain the system of monogamic
proprietorship once women have a free choice
of mates. So the women of the phalanx are not intellectual
nonentities; and since they no longer preside
over the individual home, they help run the whole
community. Is it necessary to add the common
nurseries, the common schools, the informal education
of the children, and the number of other things which
follow from this emancipation?
Perhaps one of the most remarkable characteristics
of this utopia is its utilization of a moral equivalent
for war, long before Professor William James invented
the phrase. One of the great functions of the phalanx
is the assemblage of productive armies even as “civilization”
assembles destructive ones. There is a fine
passage in which Fourier pictures an industrial army
of golden youths and maidens, “instead of devastating
thirty provinces in a campaign, these armies will have
spanned thirty rivers with bridges, re-wooded thirty
barren mountains, dug thirty trenches for irrigation,
and drained thirty marshes.” It is for lack of such
industrial armies, says Fourier, that civilization is unable
to produce anything great.
What strikes us when we put together the fragments
of Fourier’s utopia—as one might put together a jigsaw
puzzle—is the fact that he faces the variety and
inequality of human nature. Instead of erecting a
standard for men to live up to, and rejecting mankind
as unfit for utopia because the standard is far beyond
its height, the standard itself is founded upon the utmost
capacity which a community might be able to
exhibit. Fourier meets human nature half-way: he
endeavors to project a society which will give regular
channels to all its divergent impulses, and prevent them
from spilling unsocially all over the landscape. In his
statement of this aim there are plenty of weaknesses
and absurdities; and I confess that it is hard to take
this pathetic little man seriously; but when one has
grappled with Fourier’s thought one discovers that
there is something to take.
Fourier died without persuading anyone to give a
trial to his scheme of association; and yet his work
was not without its practical influence. The Brook
Farm experiment in America was a fumbling attempt to
plant a phalanstery without paying any attention to
the conditions which Fourier would have rigorously
imposed; and the “familistere” of the great steel works
of Godin at Guise, in France, is another direct result
of Fourier’s inspiration. He remains, I believe, the
first man who had a plan for colonizing the wilderness
of industrial barbarism that existed at the beginning
of the nineteenth century, and redeeming that wilderness
to civilization.
The name of Robert Owen is usually associated with
utopianism; but his work belongs more to the “real”
world than to the idola of utopia; and I pass over him
with the briefest mention, for his projects for a model
industrial town have more of the flavor of a poor colony
than that of a productive human society. Let us grant
him good intentions, organizing ability, and moral
fervor: without doubt he is a noble figure, even when
his attitude is strained and his tone strident. The
series of essays he wrote on love and marriage are
marked by fine sympathy and common sense; and it
is to be regretted that they are not as widely known
as his plans for a new moral world. If this little note
can repair the neglect, I have done Owen ample justice:
as an active figure in English and American public life
he is properly a subject for the social historian. With
Owen I must also dismiss John Ruskin, who began in
the last quarter of the nineteenth century to develop
plans for a “Guild of St. George.” This guild was to
form a little island of honest labor and sound education
in the midst of the turbid sea of industrialism; but it
did not embrace the whole of society, and it was utopian
only in the sense that the Oneida Community, let us
say, was utopian. While they are full of pregnant
suggestions, the plans for the Guild are as fragmentary
as the New Atlantis.
One of the neglected utopias of the mid-nineteenth
century is that of James Buckingham.
James Buckingham was one of those erratic men
of affairs which the fertile soil of British individualism
produces, and which hard British common sense persistently
ignores. Like Owen, Buckingham was acquainted
with industrial and commercial affairs from
the inside: he travelled widely and wrote upon various
matters with that copious, amateurish dogmatism and
spirit which marks him, perhaps, as the philistine
counterpart of John Ruskin. If the utopias of the
past express the ideals of the soldier, the farmer, and
the artisan, the community which Buckingham projected
represents the ideal of the bourgeoisie. Buckingham’s
Victoria is the ideal aspect of that Coketown
which in a later chapter we shall attempt to describe.
We talk loosely of the individualism of the nineteenth
century; but in reality it was a period that was thriving
with associations. The scope of joint stock companies
and philanthropic societies had immeasurably widened.
Along with the Mudfog Association, “for the advancement
of everything,” which Dickens satirized, there
sprang up a hundred different societies for performing
some special function in the industrial system or realizing
some particular purpose in society. Buckingham
gives us a picture of his contemporaries which is also
a criticism:
“We have the government of the country itself, passing
acts of parliament for the better drainage of towns,
and a more ample supply of water and air for ventilation....
Hence, too, arise associations of noblemen
and others for building model lodging houses for
the labouring classes; associations for improving the
dwellings of the poor; societies for providing baths and
bath houses for families unable to procure such conveniences
for themselves; associations for establishing
suburban villages for the working classes, and to get
them at night at least out of the crowded haunts and
vicious atmosphere of the towns. And hence we have
Temperance Societies, Tract Societies, Home Missions,
Asylums for Repentant Magdalens, Homes for Seaman
out of Employ, and Houses of Refuge for the Destitute,
with soup kitchens and other modes of temporary
relief....”
What does this all come to? Let Buckingham
answer:
“They are, after all, mere palliatives, and do not
reach the seat of the disease.... This can only
be done by uniting the disjointed efforts of all these
well-meaning but partially curative bodies into one,
in order to achieve, by their union of means, influence,
and example, the erection of a “Model Society,” with
its model farms, model pastures, model mines, model
manufactures, model town, model schools, model workshops,
model kitchens, model libraries, and places of
recreation, enjoyment, and instruction; all of which
could be united in one new Association.”
Without inquiring too closely into what a model
pasture may be, we may admit that the notion behind
Buckingham’s proposal was not unsound. The industrial
society of his day was in an inchoate, indeed
in a chaotic state. In order to sift out the necessary
institutions and put them on a firm basis, it was the
better part of wisdom to start anew on a fresh area
of land and attempt to plan the development of the
community as a whole. It is true that in this proposal
of Buckingham’s there is none of Fourier’s brilliant
intuitions of a true social order, and none of Ruskin’s
critical inquiry into what composed a good life:
Buckingham took contemporary values for granted.
What he sought to do was to realize these values completely,
and in orderly fashion. Here are the elements
of his proposal.
There is to be formed a model town association, with
a limited liability, for the purpose of building a new
town called Victoria. The town is to contain every
improvement in “position, plan, drainage, ventilation,
architecture, supply of water, light, and every other
elegance and convenience.” Its size is to be about a
mile square and the number of inhabitants is not to
exceed 10,000. A suitable variety of manufactures
and handicraft trades is to be established near the edge
of the town; and the town itself is to be surrounded by
farm land 10,000 acres broad. All of the lands, houses,
factories, and materials are to be the property of the
company, and not of any individual; and this property
is to be held for the benefit of all in proportion as their
shares entitle them. No person is to be a member of
the company or an inhabitant of the town except one
who is a bona fide shareholder to the extent of at least
twenty pounds, and who is ready to subscribe to a
drastic series of blue laws which, while permitting freedom
in religious worship and preventing child labor, do
away with liquor, drugs, and even tobacco.
In addition to these provisions there are to be common
laundries, kitchens, refectories, and nurseries; and
medical advice is to be given free, at home or in the
hospital, as in the army and navy. Education is to be
undertaken by the community. Justice, it should be
noted by those who are acquainted with an experiment
which has recently been started in New York, is to be
administered by competent arbitrators under a written
code of laws, without the expense, delay, and uncertainty
of ordinary legal proceedings. All members are
to sign declarations accepting arbitration and waiving
other legal proceedings against members of the
company.
All these affairs, especially the manner in which the
town is to be built, are worked out in considerable detail;
thus the size and character of the houses are set
forth on the plan, and it is provided that each workingman
is to occupy at least one entire and separate
room for himself; whilst each married couple without
children gets two rooms, and each family in which there
are children is to occupy at least three rooms for domestic
purposes. I have set down all these details
baldly because the plan itself is a bald one; and no
amount of fine writing will embellish it. Buckingham’s
society is not based upon a thoroughgoing criticism of
human institutions: the ends for which this society
exists are doubtless those which were held good and
proper by the Macaulays and the Martineaus. What
is interesting in Buckingham’s utopia is the definite
plans and specifications, accompanied by drawings; for
this is surely one of the first attempts to put a problem
in social engineering on a basis from which an
engineer or an architect could work.
Buckingham thought that, given a successful model
town, the rest of England might in time be colonized
by the surplus population, and thus the old centers of
black industry would be wiped out. Nor was Buckingham
altogether deceived. His utopia was a limited one,
but out of his limitations has come success. In 1848
this utopia was a chimera; in 1898, Mr. Ebenezer
Howard reconstructed it and set it forth in a persuasive
little book called Tomorrow, and as a direct result of
the plans advocated by Mr. Howard, a flourishing
garden city called Letchworth has come into existence;
which in turn has propagated another garden city,
called Wellwyn; and at the same time has, by example,
paved the way for numerous garden villages and
garden suburbs in various parts of Europe and in
America.
With this mid-Victorian theorist, we pass over from
a pre-scientific method of thinking to one which sacrifices
the artistic imagination to a realistic grasp of the
facts; and in this passage something is gained and
something is lost. Buckingham gains by confining his
proposals to what is immediately practicable. He
loses by not having the imaginative energy to criticize
the ways, means, and ends that are sanctioned by current
practise. If utopia begins with Plato’s glorious
dream of an organic community, the image of the just
man made perfect, it cannot end with Buckingham’s
invention of a shell. Nevertheless, through the nineteenth
century the superficial utopians, the shell-builders,
are dominant; and we must continue to examine
them.
CHAPTER SEVEN
How some Utopians have thought that a good community
rested at bottom on the right division and
use of land; and what sort of communities these
land-animals projected.
CHAPTER SEVEN — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5
Before the Industrial Revolution upset the balance
of social power, there were little villages in England
where, on a limited scale and to no very grand purpose,
a quiet and placid and fairly jolly existence must have
been the rule of things. These villages were those in
which the land was either held in freehold by small proprietors,
or where there still remained for the use of
each inhabitant certain common pastures and wastes.
Under this regime there was a fair degree of prosperity
with which only the wind and the weather and war
could interfere. Something of the savor of this life
Mr. W. H. Hudson finely conveys in his A Traveller
in Little Things; and a century ago Cobbett made a
series of excellent snapshots in his Rural Rides.
When the mediæval order broke down the great proprietors
began to seize this common land; and during
the eighteenth century, under the incentive of big-scale
scientific agriculture, the seizure went on at a merry
pace. The peasant without land was forced to migrate
to the new towns, as the Hammonds have pictured in
their graphic work on the Town Laborer; and the
labor of the peasant and his family fed the machines
which the Watts and Arkwrights were developing in
the eighteenth century. Industrial progress and social
poverty went hand in hand. The period before the
Industrial Revolution seemed in comparison a real
utopia; and the key to this utopia was the land.
The importance of land in the constitution of civil
society was emphasized by the Diggers of Cromwell’s
time; one of them, Gerard Winstanley, wrote a minor
utopia to prove that the land should be held in common;
and this view was reinforced—without the communism—in
a purely political utopia called Oceana
by James Harrington, who lived during the same
period. Harrington advocated such a distribution of
land that the landed gentry should be the leaders, and
the commonalty should have the preponderance of
power.
Out of all the modern utopias with which we have to
reckon there are two, in particular, in which the common
possession of land is the foundation of every other
institution. These are Spensonia and A Visit to Freeland.
The early part of the nineteenth century is remarkable
for the fact that men of common stock, usually
self-educated, began to apply their wits to improving
the conditions of the class to which they belonged; and
in particular there was in London a peasant named
William Cobbett, a tailor named Francis Place, and a
stationer named Thomas Spence who devoted a good
part of what remained over from their working days
to plans for bettering man’s estate.
Thomas Spence had a shop in High Holborn from
which he published little pamphlets of rough philosophy,
called Pig’s Meat; in 1795 he issued A Description
of Spensonia, which was followed in 1801 by The
Constitution of Spensonia: A Country in Fairyland
situated between Utopia and Oceana; brought from
thence by Captain Swallow. Spence’s title to have
written a complete utopia rests upon the fact that he
proposes a return to an environment which had once
been, in its fashion, complete.
Spensonia begins with a parable about a father who
had a number of sons, who built them a ship for traffic,
and who provided that the profits of the enterprise
were to be shared in common. This ship is wrecked
upon an island; and the sons quickly awake to the conclusion
that if “they did not apply the Marine Constitution
given them by their father to their landed
property, they would soon experience inexpressible inconveniences.
They therefore declared the property
of the island to be the property of them all collectively,
in the same manner as the ship had been, and that they
ought to share the profits thereof in the same way.
The island they named Spensonia, after the ship which
their father had given them. They next chose officers
to mark out such portions of the land, as every person
or family desired to occupy, for which they were to
receive for the use of the public a certain rent according
to its value. This rent was applied to public uses
or divided among themselves as they thought proper.
But in order to keep up the remembrance of their rights,
they decreed that they should never fail to share at
rent-time, an equal dividend, though ever so small, and
though the public demands should be ever so urgent....
As they had determined, when seeing that
every ship they should build and man, should ...
be the property of the crew, so, in conformity therewith,
they decreed that every district or parish which
they should people, should be the property of the inhabitants,
and the rent and police of the same at their
disposal.... A National Assembly or Congress
consisting of delegates from all the parishes takes care
of the national concerns, and defrays the expenses of
the state and matters of common utility, by a pound
rate from each parish without any other tax.”
What is a parish and what is its work? Look around
the English countryside and see.
A parish, to begin with, is a “compact portion of
the country, designedly not too large that it may the
more easily be managed by the inhabitants with respect
to its revenues and the police.”
“The parishes build and repair houses, make roads,
plant hedges and trees, and in a word do all the business
of a landlord.... A parish has many heads to
contrive what ought to be done. Instead of debating
about mending the state, ... (for ours needs no
mending) we employ our ingenuity nearer home, and
the result of the debates are in every parish, how we
shall work such a mine, make such a river navigable,
drain such a fen, or improve such a waste. These
things we are all immediately interested in, and have
each a vote in executing.”
There is a rough, homespun quality about this utopia,
and it needs a visit to the English villages of the New
Forest or the Chiltern Hills, where some of the common
lands have been kept, to see what a rural utopia
would be like if it could keep itself free from invaders
who sought to live off the fat of the land without contributing
their labor. Spence was not altogether blind
to the necessity of keeping watch over this constitution
of equality; and he places his utopia in the care of two
guardian angels—Voting by Ballot and the Universal
Use of Arms—two angels which look less formidable
and potent in the twentieth century than they did in
the first decade of the nineteenth, when the first had
still to be tried, and when the second was not complicated
by the invention of machine guns and poison
gases.
At the bottom of Spence’s Utopia, however, lies the
conviction which he shares with Plato and all the other
genuine utopians; namely, that in Thoreau’s words
less is accomplished by the thousands who are hacking
at the branches of evil than by one who is striking at
the root. Spence, it must be remembered, wrote in the
thick of the agitation for parliamentary reform which
was the keynote of so much nineteenth century activity—the
chartist movement, parliamentary socialism, and
the like, being so many rainbows in the bubble of
political effort which burst with such a bang when the
Great War broke out. Spence saw the futility of these
superficial demands. He said:
“Thousands of abortive schemes are daily proposed
for redressing grievances and mending the constitution,
whereas, the shoes were so ill-made at first, and so worn,
rotten, and patched already, that they are not worth
the trouble or expense, but ought to be thrown to the
dunghill; and a new pair should be made, neat, tight,
and easy as for the foot of one that loves freedom and
ease. Then would your controversies about this and
the other way of cobbling, that continually agitate
you, be done away; and you would walk along the
rugged and dirty path of life easy and dry-shod.”
The next utopia, Freeland, marks a transition between
the utopia in which the land alone is held by the
community and that in which land and capital and all
the machinery of production belong to a national
state.
The writer of this utopia was an Austrian economist,
Theodor Hertzka; and he first published his view in
considerable detail, with reference to current economic
doctrines, in a book called Freeland: A Social Anticipation.
He condensed these doctrines in another book
called A Visit to Freeland, or the new Paradise Regained,
an attempt to picture his freeman’s commonwealth
in action.
These books formed the center of a whirlwind of
agitation; a magazine sprang up; societies were organized
in various cities in Europe and America; and
a definite attempt was made to colonize a certain section
of Africa, selected by Hertzka; an attempt which, alas!
met with speedy failure as a result of the obtuseness
and international jealousy of various colonial officials.
The first book was published in 1889; and all this happened
in the early nineties. Perhaps the only practical
effect of it was—and this is mere conjecture—to turn
the thoughts of certain Zionists, like Israel Zangwill,
from establishing Zion in Jerusalem to building it up
again in some more suitable region in the heart of
Africa.
Freeland may be described as an individualist Utopia
on a social foundation. Hertzka was filled with sympathy
and admiration for the doctrines that Adam
Smith set forth in The Wealth of Nations; and he desired
to realize a society in which the maximum amount
of individual freedom and initiative would prevail, especially
in industrial enterprises. This leads to a
paradox; namely, that in order to ensure freedom it
is impossible to practise laissez faire; for the effect of
laissez faire is to permit accidental aggregations of
wealth and power to threaten the freedom that less
fortunate individuals seek to enjoy. So far from
being an anarchist utopia, Freeland is a co-operative
commonwealth in which the State acts as an interested
party in the production and distribution of goods. This
differs from socialism in name; and it differed from the
practical socialist agitation of the time in that it relied,
not upon turning over established institutions in
Europe, but in turning over a new leaf in the Kenia
Highlands of Africa; but Hertzka’s “individualism”
comes to almost the same thing.
A visit to Freeland teaches us little about the arts
of social life or the constitution of a good society.
What we can learn is one of the methods by which—on
hypothesis anyway—the industrial mechanism
might be controlled.
In Freeland there are five fundamental laws; and
of these the first is the most important; namely, that:
Every inhabitant has an equal right to the common
land and to the means of production which are furnished
by the state.
The other fundamental laws have to do with the support
of women and children, old men, and those otherwise
unfit to work, all of whom have the right of maintenance,
corresponding to the amount of credit belonging
to the state; with the provision of universal
suffrage for all above twenty-five years of age; and
with the establishment of independent legislative and
executive branches of the government.
Let us follow the visitor to Freeland as he makes
his first explorations in Edendale, its principal city,
and learns how affairs are conducted. If this is an
individualist utopia it is not by any means free from
the services of a bureaucracy; for first of all the visitor
turns to the Central Statistical Office, where records
are kept of the occupations that are open and the
amount of pay offered by each. “Every inhabitant of
Freeland,” our visitor finds, “has the right to become
a member of any business he pleases. One has only
to present oneself for this purpose; for the managers
only decide upon the manner in which the members are
to be employed, and not on the membership itself.”
In practice, the number of individuals with private
businesses and partnerships seems to be limited, for
big companies not merely operate factories but provide
restaurant service, build houses, and even supply
domestic service to private individuals and households.
(The visitor has his boots blacked by one of these
associated menials, and his hostess explains how the
services of a caterer and a valet may be obtained by
calling up a central distributing agency.)
The sole condition upon which a person or company
is allowed to engage in business is that the public be
kept informed of all business transactions. “The companies
are therefore obliged to conduct their book-keeping
openly. The prices at which goods are bought
and sold, the net profits and the number of workmen,
must be communicated at intervals which are fixed
according to the judgment of the central office.”
Observe that Hertzka reckons with the fact that in
an industrial society, access to machinery is just as
important as access to the land, since, in a manner
of speaking, all our modern activities, even agriculture,
are parasitic upon machinery. Hence the collection
and distribution of capital is managed in the interests
of the whole community; the first being taken care of
by a yearly tax, which obviates the need—and perhaps
the possibility—of individual savings, whilst the capital
is distributed without interest to the companies that
make application for it. The community pays for the
plant through the added charge which is laid on consumers;
the credit advanced is cancelled out through
production. This arrangement does away with the
standing charge for capital which is maintained under
present day production for profit even after the original
capital has been paid off in dividends; and above all,
it does away with the practice of capitalizing increased
returns in such a way as to enlarge the amount of the
standing charge for capital. The social use of capital
to advance production, rather than to provide fixed
incomes for a rentier class, is recognized in Freeland.
Since our visitor is an engineer, he turns to a plant
devoted to the manufacture of railway equipment; and
notes that it is run under the following statutes.
1. Everyone is free to join the first Edendale Engine
and Railway Manufacturing Co., even if he also
belongs to other companies. Everyone is also permitted
to leave the company whenever he chooses. The
board of management decides in what branch of the
works the members shall be employed.
2. Every member is entitled to an amount of the
net proceeds of the company corresponding to the
quantity of work which is done.
3. The amount of work is calculated according to
the number of hours, to which two per cent. is added to
that of the older members, and ten per cent. to foremen,
and ten per cent. for night work.
4. The engineers are paid as if working from ten to
fifteen hours, according to ability. The value of the
manager is estimated in the general assembly.
5. Out of the company’s profits a deduction is first
made towards repayment of capital, and after this the
tax to the state is deducted. The remainder is divided
among members.
6. If the company is dissolved or liquidated, the
members are responsible in proportion to the amount of
profit which they get from revenues of the company,
and this responsibility for the amount which is still
pledged is proportionately laid upon new members.
When a member leaves the company, his responsibility
for debt which has already been contracted is not extinguished.
In case of dissolution, liquidation, or sale,
this responsibility corresponds to the claim of the responsible
member to the means of the company which
are in hand, or to his share in what is sold.
7. The principal judicial body of the company is
the general assembly in which every member has the
same right to speak and exercise the same active and
passive right of choice. The general assembly makes
its determination by simply counting the majority of
votes. A majority of three quarters is necessary for
changing the statutes and for a dissolution or liquidation
of the company.
8. The general assembly practises its right either
directly or by means of chosen officials, who are answerable
to it for their actions.
9. The business of the society is managed by a directorate
of three members who hold office at the will
of the general assembly. The subordinate functionaries
are chosen by the managers.
10. The general assembly selects every year a committee
of inspection which consists of five members.
This body has to control and make a report upon the
books and the manner in which the company is conducted.
Now, as a member of the company, our visitor would
have the amount he has earned credited to him at a
Central Bank, which keeps his accounts and sends him
an abstract every week; and through this bank he would
make the larger part of his disbursements. The products
of the company, moreover, are valued, stored, and
sold by a Central Warehouse, in much the same fashion
that under the present regime a manufacturer’s whole
output may be disposed of through a big department
store or a mail order house.
Let us now sum this up. The collection and disposition
of capital belongs to the community; and the
total capital available for further production each year
is based directly upon the productive capacities of the
community, without the waste and leakage that arises
in present-day society though what Mr. Thorstein
Veblen calls the conspicuous waste—the futile expenditures—of
the leisured classes. That this collection of
a capital tax upon income would be any more difficult
than the present corporation tax or private income tax,
which is now dissipated to the extent of some 90 per
cent. or so upon armies and navies, is seriously to be
doubted. In addition to this, the process of open book-keeping
enables the Central Bank and the Central
Warehouse to have an accurate knowledge of potential
production, and thus there exists an accurate basis for
apportioning credit. At the same time the value of
commodities comes by this means to have a direct relation
to the costs of production rather than to what the
traffic will bear.
On all these heads the trained economist will doubtless
have many points to contest; but in their broad
outlines there is no abrupt departure from current
practise in any of these items, and not much reason,
perhaps, why they should not be more thoroughly instituted.
With the various ramifications of Edendale industry
and corporate finance it is not my business to deal;
we have gone far enough to see that very little indeed
remains when the question of means has been gone into.
The chief good that Freeland seems to offer is freedom
in industrial enterprise. An association of men
can get land and capital on demand, and devote themselves
to either agriculture or manufacturing industry;
and the risk of failure is minimized by a complete
knowledge of the probable demand and probable supply
calculated by the statistical bureau. Failing an
outlet for industry through association, there remains
the land itself, for individual cultivation. “Every family
in Freeland dwells in its own house, and every house
is surrounded by its great garden, a thousand square
meters in extent. These houses are the private property
of the inhabitants, and serve, like the gardens,
for private use. The inhabitants of Freeland do not,
as a rule, recognize any kind of ownership of land;
they rather go upon the principle that the land must
be put in everyone’s hands to do with what he chooses.
This, in the most literal and wide sense of the word,
means that every inhabitant of Freeland can cultivate
every piece of land whenever he pleases. But this only
relates to the land which is set apart for cultivation,
and not that set apart for living upon.... The
inhabitants of Freeland have agreed, with regard to the
size and disposition of the land, serving for the creation
of a dwelling house, to form regulations, and a kind of
building court ... which has to determine what
ground is and what is not to be built upon, parcels
out the land for building, sees to the laying out of
streets, canals, and the like, and especially takes care
that not more than one building is erected upon one
building allotment.”
What sort of life arises out of this kind of industrial
association, these provisions for the common use of
machinery and land? It is all rather dry and colorless,
a sort of picture postcard view of the Promised Land.
We are told that there are a great number of public
buildings in Edendale—an administrative palace, the
Central bank, the University, the Academy of Arts,
three Public Libraries, four Theaters, the grand central
goods warehouse, a great number of schools and other
buildings. In addition, extraordinary means are taken
to provide for public cleanliness, and the aqueducts in
Edendale—we seem to be reading a Chamber of Commerce
report!—are “almost without any equal in the
world,” moreover, “they are being extended daily.”
The refuse is cleaned away by a system of pneumatic
sucking apparatus. The streets are entirely macadamized.
Electric tramways cross them in every direction
and bind the suburbs to the town. Such glimpses as
we get of Edendale remind us, in fact, of a go-ahead
city in California or South Africa. The utopia of
Freeland is progressive enough in all conscience; for
many of these mechanical devices were only vague anticipations
in 1889; but it is progressive in a mechanical
sense; and when we examine it carefully, people
seem to live the same sort of life here as they do in a
“modern” European or American city.
There are differences, of course; and I do not seek
to minimize their importance: the slum proletariat has
been abolished; everyone belongs to the middle class and
enjoys the felicities of a high-grade clerk or an engineer
or minor official. This is the peculiarity of our nineteenth
century utopians: they do not so much criticize
the goods of their times as demand more of them!
Buckingham and Hertzka, though they differ in details,
wish to extend middle class values throughout society—comfort
and security and a plenitude of soap and sanitation.
Even when the means they propose are revolutionary,
the institutions they would erect are conceived
very much in the image of current use and wont, and
are unspeakably tame.
As we pass from Hertzka to Bellamy these facts glare
insistently at us. The slight air of tedium that I have
not been able to disguise in dealing with these utopias
arises, I believe, from our excessive familiarity with
their contents. Our nineteenth century utopias, if we
except those of Fourier and Spence and a few more
distinguished ones which we shall presently come to, do
not dream of a renovated world: they keep on adding
inventions to the present one. These utopias become
vast reticulations of steel and red-tape, until we feel
that we are caught in the Nightmare of the Age of
Machinery; and shall never escape. If this characterization
seem unjust, I beg the reader to compare the
utopias before Bacon with the utopias after Fourier,
and find out how little human significance remains in the
post-eighteenth century utopia when the machinery
for supporting the good life is blotted out. These
utopias are all machinery: the means has become the
end, and the genuine problem of ends has been forgotten.
CHAPTER EIGHT
How Étienne Cabet dreamed of a new Napoleon called
Icar, and a new France called Icaria; and how his
utopia, with that which Edward Bellamy shows us
in Looking Backward, gives us a hint of what machinery
might bring us to if the industrial organization
were nationalized.
CHAPTER EIGHT — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6
Étienne Cabet opened his eyes upon the year that
preceded the meeting of the National Assembly in 1788,
and closed them upon the Empire of Napoleon III.
It would be foolish to give an account of Cabet’s
Voyage en Icarie without noting these facts; for the
reason that Cabet’s most impressionable years were
drenched with the flamboyant light of the Napoleonic
conquests and the Napoleonic tradition which remained
as an afterglow when the conquests themselves had
fallen below the horizon. The spectacle of a nationalized
church and a nationalized system of education,
extending their ministrations to the smallest commune
through a vast system of bureaucracy, must have given
a solidity to his dreams which the interruption of the
first Napoleon’s personal downfall could only have reinforced.
To understand why the Journey to Icaria, as we
may call it, should have been one of the best sellers
among workingmen in 1845, and to see why Louis Blanc
should have attempted to set up an organization of
National Workshops in 1848, one must realize the historic
momentum of Napoleon’s dictatorship. Cabet
consciously or unconsciously idealized the Napoleonic
tradition; and in Icaria he consummated it. That
Cabet’s futile will-to-power should have led him, under
the inspiration of Owen, to the swamps of Missouri as
the leader of a little band of communist pioneers is an
ironic twist of circumstance: his Icaria was a national
state, with all its pomp and dignity and splendor, and
not a squalid collection of huts in the midst of a dreary
prairie. Cabet died in America, as much perhaps from
an outraged sense of dignity as from any physical
disease, and nothing came of his utopia until Edward
Bellamy gave it a fresh outline in Looking Backward.
With the romantic element in the Journey to Icaria—the
English lord and the Icarian family he visits,
and the various friendships and love affairs that are
outlined in its pages—I purpose to have nothing to do.
These things add an element of complication to Cabet’s
picture without doing very much to illuminate it.
Icaria is a country divided into a hundred provinces
almost equal in extent and almost the same in population.
These provinces are in turn divided into ten communes,
which are likewise almost equal, and the provincial
capital is in the center of the province, whilst each
communal city is the center of the commune. The elegance
and precision of the decimal system has overlaid
the facts of geography and as one looks over the map of
the imaginary country one recalls the way in which
the French revolution divided France into arbitrary
administrative areas called departments, upsetting
those ancient regional groupings which corresponded,
roughly, with the natural units of soil, climate, population,
and historic continuity.
In the midst of Icaria is the city of Icara. Icara is
a reconstructed Paris, built on a reconstructed Seine.
It is almost circular, cut into two equal parts by a
river whose banks have been straightened and enclosed
in two straight walls; and the bed has been deepened
to receive ocean vessels. In the middle of the city the
river divides into two arms, which form a rather big
circular island—though the islands formed naturally
by the division of a river are inevitably not circular!—and
here is the civic center, planted with trees, in the
midst of which stands a palace. There is a superb garden
elevated on a terrace; in the center, a vast column
surmounted by a colossal statue that dominates all the
buildings. On each side of the river is a big quay,
bordered by public offices. The effect is indubitably
metropolitan.
The city is divided into quarters: Icara has sixty
communes of almost equal size. In each quarter is a
school, a hospital, a temple, shops, public places, and
monuments. The streets are straight and wide, the
city being traversed by fifty avenues parallel to the
river and fifty perpendicular to it. How it is possible
to reconcile this street plan with a circular city I have
no notion; and Cabet apparently did not take the
trouble to cast his verbal specifications into a definite
picture or plan. Each block has fifteen houses on each
side, with a public building in the middle, and one at
each end; and between the rows of houses are gardens
which the inhabitants of Icaria, like those of Utopia,
have a great pride in keeping up. The blocks are arranged
around squares, very much like those of Belgravia
and Mayfair in London; but the gardens are
public ones and are cared for by the inhabitants.
The Icarian villages are almost as metropolitan as
the principal city itself. One notes a great preoccupation
with hygienic conveniences and sanitary regulations.
There are dust collectors of special model; the
sidewalks are covered with glass against rain; and the
stations for omnibuses are also covered. The streets
are well-lighted and paved. Stables, slaughter houses,
and hospitals are on the outskirts of the village. The
factories and warehouses are on the railway lines and
canals, and half the streets are closed to all traffic
except dog-carts.
In sum, Icaria enjoys a highly sophisticated and
metropolitan form of life. Everything has been “arranged,”
everything has been “attended to.” There
are no upsetting complications and diversities. Even
the weather has been disposed of. Nothing short of a
very powerful and persistent organization could have
accomplished these things. What is this organization?
In the beginning was Icar, the dictator who established
the government of Icaria, and out of Icar there
sprang a number of bureaux, departments, and committees.
Let us follow a typical Icarian through his
day, and examine the institutions he comes in contact
with.
Our Icarian is an early riser by necessity, for at 6
A. M. breakfast is served in a restaurant or factory.
It is not a capricious breakfast; it is such a breakfast,
perhaps, as the guardians of Battle Creek, Michigan,
dream of. The food that is served in Icaria is regulated
by a committee of scientists; and while everybody has
all that is good for him, precisely what is good and in
what amounts, someone else has decided in advance.
So it is at present in our armies and navies, and to
some extent in our cheap lunchrooms, the difference
being that there remains, outside Icaria, the possibility
of breaking away from the routine and following caprice
and appetite without respect for the committee of
dietitians.
When our Icarian has breakfasted, he goes to his
work, seven hours in summer, six in winter. He works
the same number of hours as every other Icarian, and
whether he works in the field or the workshop, the
products of his industry are deposited in public stores.
Who is his employer? The State. Who owns all the
instruments of production and service, down to the
horses and carriages? The State. Who organizes
the workers? The State. Who constructs the stores
and factories, attends to the cultivation of the ground,
has houses built, and makes all the things necessary
for clothing, lodging, and transport? The same. In
theory, the public is the sole proprietor and director of
industry; in practice—Cabet doesn’t tell us otherwise
and it necessarily follows in a system of national industry—a
body of engineers and officials have taken over
the dictatorship of Icar and are running the affairs of
the community.
How familiar this Icaria seems to us. Utopia—c’est
la guerre!
When he is through with his work, our Icarian possibly
changes his clothes. Exactly what clothes are
necessary, and what are permissible has already been
prescribed by a committee on clothes; which comes to
saying that every Icarian’s dress is a uniform, even as
every Icarian is an official of the State. Eating, working,
dressing, sleeping—there is no getting away from
State regulations. The uniformity that irks us in
modern life and that makes people who have some
remnant of free initiative in their makeup chafe in the
civil service, to say nothing of the army, is extended
to the last degree in Icaria. Napoleon’s conception of
a nation in arms is dominant; only now it is a nation
in overalls.
Our Icarian’s father and mother were married after
a six-month interval of courtship. Since they took
advantage of the institution at the earliest moment
permitted by law, he was twenty and she was eighteen.
By education, they had been taught to look upon conjugal
fidelity as a desideratum; and they realized that
concubinage and adultery would be looked upon as
crimes by public opinion, even if these crimes were not
punished by law. Before our Icarian was born his
mother received public instruction on maternity.
Up to the age of five our Icarian’s education was
domestic; but from the fifth to the seventeenth or eighteenth
year, domestic instruction was combined with
intellectual and moral education, under a program laid
down by a committee which had consulted all systems of
education, ancient and modern. His general or elementary
education was the same as that of every other
Icarian; but at seventeen for girls and eighteen for men,
his professional education began.
The only industries or professions open to our
Icarians were those recognized and sanctioned by the
State; and every year a list is published telling the
number of workers needed in each profession. The
number of workers, in turn, is determined by a committee
on industry, which plans the amount of goods
that must be produced during the coming year. Our
Icarian begins work at eighteen, his sister at seventeen;
and he is exempt from work at sixty-five, while she
would be exempt at fifty. The republic, I may note
parenthetically, asks from each commune the sort of industrial
and agricultural production which goes best
with its natural resources; delivering its surplus production
to other communes and giving it, in turn, what
it may lack.
Cabet describes all these institutions in the minutest
fashion, down to the noiseless window with which each
Icarian’s house is equipt; but the broad outlines of the
industrial and social system are contained in this picture.
What we see is a National State, abundantly
organized for war, and remaining on that footing in
the midst of its peace-time activities. What is not of
national importance, in this scheme of things, is of no
importance; and the people who decide what is or is
not of national importance are the officeholders—I find
it difficult to discover a utopian equivalent for this word
or to fancy any great improvement in utopia—in the
capital.
The political activities that regulate these Icarian
institutions do not greatly reassure us. From each of
the thousand communes two deputies are chosen to
hold office for two years: this constitutes the national
representation. The basis of this system is the communal
assembly; and from this communal assembly the
provincial representatives are drawn. The national
executive consists of sixteen members, each with a special
department; and it is plain that here is the seat of
power; for exactly what business remains in the hands
of the two thousand legislators when the food committee
has determined the amount and variety of food, the
industrial committee the quantity and kind of manufactured
products, and the educational committee the
methods, subjects, and aims of education, it is a little
hard to determine.
There are no newspapers and no means of organized
criticism, except the right of submitting propositions
to the popular assemblies. The only thing resembling
public opinion is the collective opinion of these assemblies.
The newspapers are published by the government,
one for the nation, one for the province, and one
for the commune; and they are devoted solely to the
presentation of news, divorced from opinion. For this
kind of political system, and for all the power that it
might presume to wield, there is a word in philosophy
which has no substitute—epiphenomenon. The popular
system of representation in Icaria is but a shadow of
that dictatorial power which was first wielded by Icar
and was in turn transmitted to the committees and
bureaux.
If I have been criticizing Icaria in terms of the last
century of political experience, I can only plead that
it is because Icaria is so little like Utopia and so much
like the actual order of things. It must be prepared
to stand fire as a fait accompli: indeed, in the early days
of the second Russian revolution it came near to being
a fait accompli—there was more of Cabet than of
Marx perhaps in embryonic Soviet Russia! Icaria is
essentially not an ideal but an idealization; and it is
in order to keep the two from being confused that I
have emphasized its little weaknesses. What is good
in Icaria is what is good in the institution of an army;
what is bad is what is bad in the execution of a war.
If the good life could be perpetrated by a junta of
busybodies, as Plato would call them, Icaria would be
a model community.
Looking backward into the future: that was the
paradox by which a young New England romancer,
Edward Bellamy, concerned like Thoreau and Emerson
and the rest of the great Concord school with
the well-being of his community, descended from literature
to sociology; and stirred the minds of thousands
of people in America in much the same fashion that
Theodor Hertzka, writing at the same time, stirred his
European contemporaries. Having begun to romanticize
about reality, Bellamy during the decade that
followed the publication of Looking Backward, devoted
himself to realizing his romance. In a later work,
Equality, he set forth his picture of the New Society
of the year 2000 in much greater detail; just as if
the popularity of his first work committed him to take
up seriously the tasks of the economist and the statesman.
The chief pleasure, nowadays, in both of these books
is the familiar one of recognition; for if Bellamy did
not portray a better future he at any rate, like Mr.
H. G. Wells, in his early romances, outlined many
parts of a future that has for us, in the twentieth century,
become an actuality; a fact which makes us
realize very poignantly the limitations of his utopia.
In spite of a thin-lipped style, Bellamy handles his
story in a neat, workmanlike way, with a certain plausibility
and familiarity which doubtless explains the fact
that it can still be found, without any difficulty, on
the fiction shelves of our circulating public libraries.
The preface to Looking Backward is dated: “Historical
Section Shawmut College, Boston, December 26,
2000.” In that preface the work is presented as an
avowed romance which will enable the readers of 2000
to realize the gaps that separate them from their
ancestors, and to value the prodigious “moral and
material” transformation that has taken place in a few
generations. Julius West is a person whom our Shawmut
historian invents, to bridge the gap between the
two eras. Julius West, a young man of wealth, sensitive
to the ignominy of his position, and feeling that, as
a “rich man living among the poor, an educated man
among the uneducated,” he “was like one living in isolation
among a jealous and alien race.” In order to
overcome his insomnia West sleeps in a vaulted room in
the foundations of his house, and gets put to sleep by
a hypnotist; and so by a dramatic oversight he hibernates
for 113 years, and awakens among strange faces.
Needless to say, West has a love affair in the old world
which is carried on in the new, through a descendant of
the girl he meant to marry; and it is equally needless to
observe that he reawakens to the world of 1887 as soon
as the institutions of 2000 have been described and the
love affair has been resolved.
Let us take West’s muzziness, his amazement, and
his sense of isolation for granted, and follow him as he
explores his new environment.
If Plato cavalierly disposes of the labor problem of
the Republic by permitting things to remain pretty
much as they were, Bellamy makes the solution of
labor organization and the distribution of wealth the
key to every other institution in his utopia.
In the United States of 1887 the growing organization
of labor and the aggregation of capital into trusts
were the two chief economic factors: Dr. Leete, Julius
West’s host, pictures how this aggregation and combination
were continued until, by a mere shift of gears,
“the epoch of trusts had ended in The Great Trust.” In
a word, “the people of the United States concluded to
assume the conduct of their own business, just as one
hundred years before they had assumed the conduct of
their own government, organizing now for industrial
purposes on precisely the same grounds that they had
organized for political purposes.” Was there any violence
in this transition? Ah no! everything had been
prepared beforehand by public opinion, the great corporations
had gradually trained everybody into an acceptance
of large-scale organization, and the final step
of merging all the big corporations into a national
corporation occurred without a jar. With the assumption
by the nation of the mills, machinery, railroads,
farms, mines, and capital in general, all the difficulties
of labor vanished, for every citizen became by virtue of
his citizenship an employee of the government, and was
distributed according to the needs of industry.
In 2000 “the labor army” is not a figure of speech:
it is an army indeed, for the nation is a single industrial
unit, and the principle upon which the working
force is recruited is universal compulsory industrial
service. After a man’s education has been completed
in the common school system, which extends straight
through college, he must first serve a term of three
years in an unclassified labor army, which performs all
the rough and menial tasks of the community. When
this period is over, he is permitted to offer himself as
a recruit in any of the trades or professions which
may be declared open by the government, and can
train for his calling up to the age of thirty, in the
national schools and institutes. In order to attract
people into occupations where they are needed, the
hours are reduced and, for the dangerous trades, volunteers
are called for. There are however no discriminations
in pay. Every person is credited with a sum of
four thousand dollars per annum at the National Bank,
a sum which he receives because of his needs as a man
and not because of his capacity as a worker. Instead
of being rewarded for giving the full measure of his
energies and abilities, a man is penalized if he fails to
do so. It is possible to shift from one branch of the
service to another, under certain restrictions, even as
in the navy one can change one’s rating and apply for
service on a different ship or station, but except for
the possibility of retiring on a half-income at the age
of thirty-three, everyone must remain at work until he
is forty-five.
To this rule there is one exception; and we may note
ironically that it is made in favor of the writer’s guild.
If a man produces a book he may name his own royalties,
and live as long from this income as the sale will
allow; and if he wishes to start a newspaper or a magazine,
and can get credit from a sufficient number of
other people to support his enterprise, there is nothing
to prevent him from remitting service to the amount
his guarantors are ready to deduct from their personal
income. In other words, a man must “either by
literary, artistic, or inventive productiveness indemnify
the nation for the loss of his services, or must get a
sufficient number of people to contribute to such an
indemnity.” This is the one open hole in our militarized,
industrial utopia; and I think it is the most
acceptable feature in the whole system. A community
organized as a single unit, directed by a general staff
at Washington, and perpetually exhibiting a herd complex
which every institution would naturally reinforce,
might not be a very genial shelter for the soul of an
artist; but if it were, this means of support would
doubtless be fair and excellent for the encouragement
of the arts.
To go back to our army. The entire field of production
and distribution is divided into ten great departments,
each representing a group of allied industries;
and each particular industry is in turn represented
by a subordinate bureau, which has a complete
record of the plant and the force under its control, of
the present product, and of the means of increasing it.
The estimates of the distributive department, after
adoption by the administration, are sent as mandates
to the ten great departments, which allot them to the
subordinate bureaux, representing the particular industries,
and these set the men at work.... “After the
necessary contingents have been detailed for the various
industries, the amount of labor left for other employment
is expended in creating fixed capital, such as
buildings, machinery, engineering works, and so forth.”
In order to safeguard the consumer from the caprices
of the administration, a new article must be produced
as soon as a certain guaranteed demand for it has been
established by popular petition, whilst an old article
must be continued to be produced as long as there are
customers for it, provision being made that the price
rise in accordance with the greater cost of production
per unit.
Now the general of this industrial army is the president
of the United States. He is chosen from among
the corps commanders; and it is provided that every
officer in the army, from the president down to the
sergeant, must work his way up from the grade of
common laborer. The chief peculiarity of this system
consists in the way in which the voting is done. The
voters are all honorary members of the guild to which
they belong; that is, men who are over forty-five years
old; this applies not merely to the ten lieutenant generals,
but to the commander-in-chief, who is not eligible
for the presidency until he has been a certain number
of years out of office. The president is elected by vote
of all the men of the nation who are not connected with
the industrial army; for any other method, Bellamy
thinks, would be prejudicial to discipline. There are
various names for this practice: one of them is gerontocracy,
or government by the aged; and another, more
familiar, is “alumni control.” When we recollect that
the hardships of military service look rather mild and
pleasant to the man who has been mustered out, I doubt
if the youngsters in the industrial army would stand
much chance of having their lot improved if the initiative
for a change had to come from the alumni. Yet
we know what even the formation of a worker’s shop
committee would be in an industrial army: it would be
mutiny. As for criticism of the administration, that
would be treason; admiration for the practices of another
country would be disloyalty; and advocacy of a
change in the method of industry would be sedition.
True: corruption and bribe-taking and all the dirty
scandals that we associate today with a financial oligarchy
would be wiped out in utopia; but this merely
means that the defects of the old order would disappear
along with its virtues. What would remain would be
the defects that arise when a nation is in arms, and
when there is no escape, by travel or mental withdrawal,
from its institutions; in short, the defects of a state
of war. To call this a peaceful community is absurd:
one might as well call a battleship a pleasure-craft because
a modern one possesses a band and shows motion
pictures to the crew. The organization of this utopia
is an organization for war; and the one rule that such
a community would not tolerate is “live and let live.”
If this is the peace that “industrial preparedness”
ensures it is scarcely worth having. Any community
that liked this state of life would scarcely need the
constant exhortation of the recruiting sergeant or the
final compulsion of a conscription act.
The great part of Looking Backward is a discussion
of this perfected form of industrial organization; the
manner in which it is worked; and the effects of complete
economic equality in doing away with the necessity
for the greater part of the legal machinery of the present
day, since crimes with an economic motive would
almost, according to Bellamy, be unthinkable. Here
and there however we have glimpses of the social life of
this new age.
First of all, there floats before our eyes the picture
of a vast body of superannuated persons, who for the
most part spend their time in a sort of country-club
existence. They can travel, because the other countries
in the world are likewise nationalized, and by a simple
system of book-keeping foreign credit for goods and
personal services can be transferred from one country
to another; and they can take up special vocations and
hobbies during their superannuated years; but it is
equally plain that their work has not done very much
to foster intellectual or emotional maturity, since in relation
to the citizens the state exists as a “Great White
Father”; and there is good reason perhaps for the
great interest in sport which characterizes Bellamy’s
utopia. Games are organized, apparently, upon lines
of industrial guild rivalry; just as one has sports nowadays
between rival battleship squadrons perhaps; for
“if bread is the first necessity of life, recreation is a
second, and the nation caters for both.” The demand
for bread and circuses, our guide explains, is recognized
in the year 2000 as a wholly reasonable one.
Both work and play are external to the citizen’s inner
trends and interests; and we should not be surprised
if an infantile element predominated in the character of
this happy republic.
This externalism, this impersonality, seems to characterize
the whole scene. We follow Julius West and
his new love, Edith, into a modern shop, where everything
is displayed by sample, and an order for goods
is sent to a central warehouse, and along with undoubted
economies of space and time, we note that there
is an almost complete absence of personal contacts or
relationships: more than ever the worker has become
a cog in the machine, more than ever he deals with a
thin, barren, abstract world of paper notations, more
than ever his desire for social contacts is dammed
up; and so, more than ever, there must be occasion in
this new age for stimulants and socialities beside which
the roller coasters of Coney Island and the promiscuities
of a modern dance hall would be insipid things.
Bellamy does not show us what these compensatory institutions
would be: but he has invented a high-powered
engine of repression, and he does not fool us when he conceals
the safety-valve. Unless there is a safety-valve his
universal army, under a rigorous discipline for twenty-four
years, is bound to blow up the works. We can guess
when we read the cheap illustrated papers, when we go
to the movies, when we watch the behavior of the crowds
on Broadway, what this twenty-first century Utopia
would be like—it would be all that a modern city is,
exaggerated. In The New Society, Dr. Walter Rathenau
drew a picture of a socialized modern society,
moving along its present path without any change in
its aims and ideals; and that nightmare of his must be
added to Bellamy’s dream in order to define it.
It is the same with every other institution. There
is a big communal restaurant in which each family of
the neighborhood has a private room; this is the place
where the principal meal is ordered by the family, and
served by young conscript waiters. Am I at fault if
I point out that this universal hostelry is a little too
elaborate and mechanical; that there is more promise of
a genuine utopia in Plato’s olives and cheese and beans,
simply served, than in the “perfection of catering and
cooking” which the new age boasts. So one could go
down the line and enumerate the mechanical marvels
which take the place of a fully humanized life; marvels
like the telephone concerts and sermons which astoundingly
anticipate by thirty-odd years the radio broadcasting
service which is now a prevalent mania in
America. Are these things, as Aristotle would have
said, the material bases of the good life, or are they
substitutes for the good life? There may have been
some doubt as to the answer in Bellamy’s time; but
I think there need not be any at present. In so far as
these instruments are consonant with humanized purposes
they are good; in so far as they are irrelevant
they are so much rubbish—idiotic rubbish. A free
public library is a good thing; but a free public library
devoted exclusively to distributing the novels of Gene
Stratton Porter and the uplift books of Mr. Orison
Swett Marden would not contribute so much as a useful
platitude towards a vivid and stimulating society.
There is no escaping the problem of ends and the
problem of ends, if I may be permitted a pun, belongs
at the beginning. Subordinate to humanized ends, machinery
and organization—yes, complicated machinery
and organization—have undoubtedly a useful contribution
to make towards a good community; unsubordinated,
or subordinated only to the engineer’s conceptions
of an efficient industrial equipment and personnel,
the most innocent machine may be as humanly devastating
as a Lewis gun. All this Bellamy overlooked in
Looking Backward, and yet—something remains.
What remains in Looking Backward is the honest
passion that inspired the man; the play of generous
impulses; the insistence that there is no fun for an
ordinarily imaginative person in dining with Dives
whilst Lazarus hangs around the table. Bellamy
wanted everyone to be equally educated, so that everyone
might be his companion; he wanted everyone to be
decently fed and sheltered; he wanted to take his share
in the dirty work and to see that accidents of wealth
did not keep other people from taking theirs. He
wanted private life to be simple and public life to
be splendid. He wanted men and women to mate with
each other without permitting this relationship to be
compromised by obligations to a father, a mother, or the
butcher, the baker, and the grocer. He wanted the
generous, the just, and the tender-hearted to be as well
endowed as the cold-hearted, the greedy, and the self-seeking.
He pleaded for an absence of artificiality and
restraint in the relations of the sexes; for such a candor
as has perhaps come into fashion again—thank
heaven!—today, a candor which permits women physical
freedom in dress, and a spiritual freedom in exhibiting
their love, and giving it freely. All this is to
the good. I do not question Bellamy’s fine motives;
I question only the outlets he imagined for them. There
is a breach between Bellamy’s conception of the good
life and the structure he erected to shelter it. This
breach is due, I believe, to an over-emphasis of the part
that wholesale mechanical organization, directed by a
handful of people, would play in such a reconstruction.
If Bellamy sometimes exaggerated the bad in modern
society, with its muddle of competitive privileges, he
likewise overestimated the good that it contained; and
he was more than fair to the present order of things
when he made the future so closely in its image.
CHAPTER NINE
How William Morris and W. H. Hudson renew the
classic tradition of utopias; and how, finally, Mr.
H. G. Wells sums up and clarifies the utopias of
the past, and brings them into contact with the
world of the present.
CHAPTER NINE — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7
It would be a pretty sad thing if the Utopias of the
nineteenth century were all of a piece with those of
Buckingham and Bellamy. In general we may say that
all the utopias of reconstruction had a deadly sameness
of purpose and a depressing singleness of interest; and
although they saw society whole, they saw the problem
of reconstructing society as a simple problem of industrial
reorganization. Fortunately, the utopias of escape
have something to contribute which the utopias of
reconstruction lack; and if William Morris, for example,
seems too remote from Manchester and Minneapolis
to be of any use, he is by that token a little nearer the
essential human realities: he knows that the chief dignity
of man lies not in what he consumes but in what
he creates, and that the Manchester ideal is—devastatingly
consumptive.
Before I go into these utopias of escape, I wish to
point out the strange way in which the three utopias
we shall examine return as it were upon their classic
models, each of the returns being, it is fairly plain,
without the consciousness of the writer. Mr. W. H.
Hudson returns upon More; and in A Crystal Age the
farmstead and the family is the ultimate unit of social
life. In News from Nowhere the city of workers, such
as Andreæ dreamed of, comes again into being; and
in A Modern Utopia, with its order of Samurai, we are
ruled once more by a highly disciplined class of Platonic
guardians. Mr. Hudson is a naturalist with a deep
sympathy for the rural life of England; William Morris
was a craftsman who knew what the English town was
like before it had been blighted by industrialism; and
with both of these men we feel close to the essential
life of man and the essential occupations.
As the clouded vision of the traveller to the Crystal
Age clears, he finds himself received in a great Country
House, which is inhabited by a large group of men
and women who till the land and perform the simple
operations of weaving and stonecutting and the like.
All over the world, one gathers, these great country
houses dot the landscape. Each of them is no weekend
center of social life but a permanent home; indeed
their permanence is almost past believing; for in each
house traditions are carried back thousands of years.
The great cities and the complicated metropolitan customs
that they produced have long been wiped away,
as one might wipe away mold. The world has been
stabilized; the itch for getting and spending has disappeared.
Our traveller must bind himself to work
for a whole year in order to pay for the garments his
house-mates weave for him, garments whose texture and
cut have a classic turn.
This household, I say, is the social unit of the Crystal
Age: the house-father administers the laws and
customs, and he dispenses the punishment of seclusion
when the visitor trespasses upon the code of the house.
The house-mates work together, eat together, play together,
and listen together to the music of a mechanical
instrument called the musical sphere. At night they
sleep in separate little cubicles which can be opened to
the night air. The horses and dogs of the Crystal Age
have a degree of intelligence which our common breeds
do not possess, so that the horses all but harness themselves
to the plow, and the dog teaches the traveller
when to leave off working the animals. Each household
has not merely its laws and traditions: it has its
literature; its written history; and the very girl with
whom the traveller falls in love bears a resemblance to
the sculptured face of an unhappy house-mother who
lived and suffered in the immemorial past. These houses,
these families, these social relations are built for endurance.
What is the secret of their strength?
The secret of our Crystal Age Utopia is the secret of
the beehive: a queen bee. The Crystallites have done
away with the difficulties of mating by appointing one
woman, in every house, to be the house-mother, the
woman whose capital duty is to carry on the family:
the entire burden of each generation falls upon her
shoulders, and in return for the sacrifice she is treated
with the respect due to divinity, like the young man
who was chosen in the Kingdom of Montezuma, as the
tales have it, to represent the chief deity until at the
end of a year he was disembowelled. The wish of a
house-mother is a command; the word of the house-mother
is law. For a year before her retirement as
mother she is put into communion with the sacred books
of the house, and has at her command a store of
knowledge which the rest of the hive are not permitted
to share. It is she who keeps burning the fires of life.
For all except the house-mother sex is a matter of
purely physical appearance. The Crystallites, if
we may speak irreverently, are “content with a
vegetable love—which would certainly not suit me” nor,
it appears, did it suit our traveller to the Crystal Age,
when he discovers that his passion could never be reciprocated
by his beloved, even if she so far transgressed
the laws of the household as to give way to him.
Against the appearance of passion and all the mortal
griefs that it carries with it, the house-mother possesses
a remedy. When in the murk of despair our
traveller turns to her for advice and consolation, she
gives him a phial of liquid. He drinks it in the belief
that it will make him as free from passion as his house-mates;
and he is not deceived; for—he dies.
The social life of the household is not to be wrecked
by the storms and stresses of the individual’s passions.
The engines of life are no longer dangerous: the fuel
has been taken away! A “chill moonlight felicity” is
all that remains.
There are times when one may look upon the whole
adventure of civilized life as a sort of Odyssey of domestication;
and in this mood the Crystal Age marks a
terminus upon that particular aspect of the adventure.
To the objection that this sort of utopia requires that
we change human nature, the answer, in terms of modern
biology, is that there is no apparent scientific
reason why certain elements in human nature should
not be selected and brought to the front, or why certain
others should not be reduced in importance and
eliminated. So, for all practical purposes, there is no
apparent reason why human nature should not be
changed, or why we should not be prepared to believe
that in times past it has been changed—communities
which selectively bred for pugnacity and aggression
committing suicide and opening the way for communities
which socially selected other traits that made for
survival. It is possible that in times past man has
done a great deal to domesticate himself and fit himself
for harmonious social life; and a utopia which rests
upon the notion that there should be a certain direction
in our breeding is not altogether luny; indeed, is nowadays
less so than ever before, for the reason that it is
possible to separate romantic love from physical procreation
without, as the Athenians did, resorting to
homosexuality.
If A Crystal Age opens our minds to these possibilities
it is not to be counted purely as a romance;
in spite of the fact that as a romance it has passages
that rival Green Mansions. Between the individual
households and common marriages, the utopia of the
beehive is a third alternative which possibly remains to
be explored.
There are regions in the world—I am thinking perhaps
of the table land of South Africa and the Mississippi
Valley—where if one dreamed about utopia the
apparatus to support it would be a gigantic network of
steel, and huge communities of people would naturally
flow together and coalesce in complicated patterns,
somewhat after the fashion of those which Mr. H. G.
Wells describes in When the Sleeper Awakens. It
would be almost impossible, I fancy, to dream of a simple
life and of handfuls of people in those parts of the
earth: the simplicity would be barrenness, and a handful
of people would be lost.
It is different with the valley of the Thames, that little
stream which begins a short way above Oxford and
meanders between banks of lush grass and bending
willows, down through Marlow, where musty ales have
long been made, past Windsor between the Great Park
and the Chiltern Hills, through Richmond and so down
to Hammersmith where one might perhaps ford the
river at low tide if an iron bridge did not carry one
across, till below the city of London the estuary becomes
a wide tide of water and expands proudly to meet
the sea. Nature has carved this valley to the human
scale: the houses are not dwarfed by the landscape; and
except for the huge warren of London—for which
nature is not responsible—there is a fitness between the
actor and the scene which, without offering any great
Olympian moments, gives the naïve and jolly and whole-hearted
effect that one finds in a good English hunting
print or, let us say, in Pickwick Papers. In such an
atmosphere, particularly as one thinks of it on a day
late in June, human nature bubbles naturally into good
nature, and whatever harshness remains, a tankard of
ale will drain away.
It is in this valley of the Thames that William Morris
awoke to find his utopia, after returning to his home
in Hammersmith, the last really urban borough of
London as one goes upstream. From that landscape,
sweetened and freshened and ridden of cockney landmarks,
Morris evokes the spirit of the River God, as
Socrates and Phædrus, by the banks of the Ilyssus, call
forth the spirit of Pan.
With all the grime and tedium of the dull ’eighties
lying upon his soul, Morris finds himself transported
to a world which has been cleansed by a revolution of
a greater part of the nineteenth century landmarks.
In the meanwhile, grass has laid a decent blanket over
many irretrievable ruins. The house in which he has
gone to bed is now a Guest House; and he is first received
into this refurbished world by a boatman who
takes him for a morning swim on the Thames, and
knows about the value of money only as a collector of
copper curios might. At breakfast, he finds himself
among a group of friendly people, who call him “Guest”;
and he is taken firmly and sweetly and quite serenely
in hand by the comely young women who preside over
the house. These women, like everyone else in the new
Thames valley, are healthy, full-blooded, athletic, sane,
and free from the puling maladies which idleness or
overwork gave to the women of the nineteenth century.
The other guests are a weaver who has come
down from the north to take a turn at the boatman’s
job while the latter goes up towards Oxford to help
gather in the hay, and a loquacious dustman in marvellous
greens and golds.
In this new England, work has become what one
would call in the kindergarten “busy work”: in the simplification
of the standard of living and the release from
the pressure of artificially stimulated wants, the main
business of getting a living is easily performed, and
the chief concern of everyone is to do his work under
the pleasantest conditions possible—a demand which
brings back many of the handicrafts, and places a great
premium on manual skill. Although the mechanical
arts have been improved in certain directions, for in his
trip up the Thames our guest meets with a barge
driven by some internal engine, let us say by electricity,
a good many devices have been allowed to fall into
disuse, because, although the output in goods might
be greater, the work itself and the way of life it promotes
are not so beneficial as the simple methods of
hand labor. In every direction, simplicity and direct
action and the immediate supply and interchange of
goods out of local produce, has taken the place of the
monstrously complicated system of traffic that prevailed
in the earlier imperialistic world. Work is given freely,
and the proceeds of work exchanged freely, as a man
might give of his goods and services nowadays when he
welcomes a friend within his own house. A great part
of the energy of this new community has gone into
building; and architecture, sculpture, and painting
flourish in the townhalls and common dining halls of
which each village boasts.
It follows from this that the big cities have disappeared.
London is again a congeries of villages, mingled
in great woodlands and meadows where in the
summer children roam about and camp and pick up the
simple occupations of rural life. Of all the proud
monuments of London that the nineteenth century left,
only the Houses of Parliament remain, as a storage-place
for dung. There are shops, where one takes for
the asking, and there are common halls where people
eat and have conversation, as they do now in restaurants—only
these new hostels are beautiful, spacious,
and well-served.
Since economic pressure is absent, the people of the
Thames valley seem to live a life of leisure; but this
life of leisure is not the aimless leisure of the country
house, with its artificial stimulants, its artificial exercises,
and the like: the life of dignified leisure is a life
of work; in short, the life of the artist. If other
people have talked of the necessity for labor, the dignity
of labor, the heroism of labor, these simple Englishmen
have discovered the beauty of leisurely work—the
simple grace that follows when even the practical
arts are pursued as if they were liberal arts. In this
utopia the instinct of workmanship, the creative impulse,
has free play; and since the majority of people
are neither scholars nor scientists, as Sir Thomas More
would have had them, they find their fulfillment in adding
beauty to all the necessities of their daily toil.
Where the work itself leads purely to some useful end,
as in the growing of wheat or grass, the joy of work
arises out of the comradeship and good-feeling that
bind together those who perform it, and the comparative
lightness of the tasks that find many hands eager
almost to the point of competition to perform them.
One looks at the faces of these people, and the effects
of their life are visible. Their women are ten or fifteen
years older than we should judge by their appearance;
and on every face is written the healthy
serenity that follows when people do good work, with
a good spirit, in a good place. There is a candor, a
plainness, a wholesomeness, an absence of furtive repressions
in their every gesture; and as far as men can be
satisfied and happy in a good environment, this community
is satisfied and happy. There are grumblers, it
goes without saying. One of them is a crusty old fellow
who has read ancient history and who sighs for
the cutthroat practices of the competitive era; and
there is another who complains of the tameness of
Utopian literature, as compared with that which dealt
with the miseries and warped passion of an earlier
age.
The only wretchedness in this utopia comes out of the
essential human tragedy—the disparity between one’s
aims and one’s attainments, between one’s desires and
the circumstances that clog their fulfillment. How can
unhappiness be altogether wiped out as long as maids
are fickle and sexual passion strong? The boatman,
for example, has been mated with a beautiful girl
who leaves him for another man; but she tires of her
new love, and under the eyes of the Guest her uncle
brings the pair together, and the drama of courtship
and mating goes on all over again; for there are no
laws to bind people together when every fibre of their
being drives them apart; and in a civilization that
deals kindly even with its adults there is no difficulty
about giving the children all the care they need. For
the most part, those who suffer in love bear their burdens
manfully, without wailing over imaginary wrongs
which are associated with the worship of impossible
chastities and reticences; and they turn their balked
impulses into the channels of work and poetry as completely
as they know how.
Is this the arcadian age of innocence all over again?
Are brutality and lust forever wiped out? Not at all.
In sudden passion even murders occur, no matter how
good and helpful the social order; but instead of compounding
murder with an additional murder, the guilty
person is left to his own remorse. Use and wont are
more powerful than law, and the whole guild that
earns its living from the frictions and dissidences of
our social life has dropt into limbo. By the same
token, the game of the ins and the outs, which we
call political government, has disappeared; for the
only matters in which our community is interested are
as to whether a new field is to be laid under the plow
or a bridge thrown over a stream or a townhall built;
and about such things the local community is competent
to decide, without lining up in a purely fictitious
antagonism.
Sanity and health and good-will and tolerance—as
one sculls along the Thames, above Richmond, on a
Sunday morning, between boatloads of gay picnickers
and sauntering people, it is not impossible to imagine
a new social order developing on simple lines and bringing
these things into existence. With five million people
in England, and perhaps half a million in the Thames
valley, the thing would not be impossible. Then the
whole countryside would be dressed again in green; then
buildings would arise in the landscape like flowers out of
the ground; then the kindliness and spontaneous co-operation
of a happy holiday would be prolonged into
the workaday week. We should know how to spend our
time and with what to occupy our heads and hands, if
the great wen of London were removed from the Thames
valley, and all the cheap cockney things that London
has conjured into existence were to be blasted away.
We should know all these things, because William Morris
has told us about them; and we should do all these
things, because in our heart of hearts we realize that
they would satisfy.
The utopia that remains for consideration is the last
important one in point of time; and it is, curiously
enough, the quintessential utopia, for it is written with
a free and critical gesture, and with a succinct familiarity
towards the more important books that came before
it. Mr. H. G. Wells, it is true, has made more than
one excursion into an imaginary commonwealth: The
Time Machine is his earliest and The World Set Free
may possibly be considered as his latest. A Modern
Utopia combines the vivid fantasy of the first picture
with the more strict regard for present realities that
marks the second; and it is, altogether, a fine and lucid
product of the imagination.
The assumption upon which Mr. Wells gains entrance
into his utopia differs from those shipwrecks
and somnambulisms in which our modern utopias have
been stereotyped. He conceives of a modern man, a
little thickset and protuberant, seated at a desk and
brooding over the possibilities of man’s future; and
gradually this image comes to life and defines his views,
and his voice rises into narrative in something like the
fashion of a lecturer, throwing from time to time his
illustrations of a New World upon the screen. He
enters utopia by hypothesis; that is, without any other
subterfuge than an act of the imagination; and in the
thickening realities of a utopian community, first discovered
in an Alpine pass, he finds himself in the company
of a sentimental botanist, who is sick with a love
affair and is maudlin about dogs, and who again and
again wrecks this exploration of utopia by dragging
into the midst of the scene some petty complication—about
his sweetheart or his doggie—that he has acquired
on earth!
Where and what is this modern utopia? By hypothesis,
it is a globe identical with the one on which we
live; it has the same oceans and continents, the same
rivers and minor land-masses, the same animals and
plants; yes, even the same people, so that each one of
us has his utopian counterpart. Conveniently, this new
earth is located beyond Sirius; and for the most part
its history is parallel to ours; except that it had a
critical turn for the better at a not too remote period;
so that, while mechanical invention and science and
all that sort of thing is exactly on the same level as
ours, the scale and order is entirely different.
The scale and order of things is indeed different.
Utopia is a world community; it is a single civilization
whose net of monorails and posts, whose identification
bureaux, whose rules of law and order are the same
in England as in Switzerland; and presumably the
same in Asia and Africa as in Europe. In every sense
it is a modern utopia. Machinery plays an important
part, and the absence of menial service is conspicuous
from the very first contacts in which our travellers get
the hospitality of an inn, and find that interior decoration
has verged towards the style of the modern lunchroom
and subway station, so that the whole room can be
redded, after use, by the guest himself. There is no
harking back to the past in industry, in architecture, or
in the mode of living. All that machinery has to offer
has been accepted and humanized: there is a cleanliness,
an absence of squalor and confusion, in this world-community,
which indicates that utopia has not been
purchased by evasion.
The price of this order and spaciousness is not as
heavy as that which Bellamy was willing to pay in
Looking Backward. The land and its natural resources
are owned by the community and are in the custody of
regional authorities; and the means of communication
and travel are in the hands of one common administrative
body. There are great socialized enterprises such
as the railways, with planetary ramifications; there are
regional industries, and there are a good many minor
affairs which are still undertaken by private individuals
and companies. Farms are worked by a co-operative
association of tenant farmers, upon lines suggested by
Dr. Hertzka in Freeland. Perhaps the most remarkable
feature of utopian organization is the registration
of every individual, with his name, numeral, finger-print,
changes of residence and changes in life; all of which
is filed in a huge central filing office, to become part of
a permanent file upon the individual’s death. Utopian
registration gets our travellers into hot water, for
they are naturally mistaken for their utopian doubles;
but outside of its use in the story this little device
seems strangely beside the point, and it arose, I believe,
out of Mr. Wells’ temperamental regard for tidiness—tidiness
on a planetary scale—the tagging and labelling
of a well-conducted shop....
The people of our Modern Utopia are roughly divided
into four classes: the kinetic, the poietic, the base, and
the dull. The kinetic are the active and organizing
elements in the community: as active kinetics they are
the managers, the enterprisers, the great administrators,
as passive kinetics they are the minor officials, the
innkeepers, the shoptenders, farmers, and the like. The
poietic are the creative elements in the community; the
“intellectuals” we should perhaps call them. This follows
in general the lines laid down by Comte—chiefs,
people, intellectuals, and emotionals, and perhaps something
of the same classification was outlined by More
in his Philarchs, people, priests, and scholars. This
division of classes is a very ancient one. In that old
Indian script, the Bhagavad Gita, we find that the population
is divided into Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaisryas,
and Sudras, and that their duties are “determined by
the modes that prevail in their separate natures.” The
residual classes of the base and the dull correspond
to the Sudras; they are, of course, the slag of the
community; and the active elements in this class, the
criminals, the habitual drunkards, and the like are exported
to various islands in the Atlantic where they
have organized a community of their own in which they
may practice fraud, chicane, and violence to their
hearts’ content.
Like Plato, Mr. Wells is concerned to provide for the
education, discipline, and maintenance of people who
will be sufficiently disinterested and intelligent to keep
this vast organization a going concern—no ordinary
politician or captain of industry will do. Hence there
arises a class of Samurai. These Samurai are selected
by rigorous mental and physical tests out of youth
who are past twenty-five, up to which time they may
be foolish and unsettled and may sow their wild oats.
These Samurai have a high intellectual standard of
achievement. They live a simple life. They are under
strict moral discipline, and follow a minute regimentation
of dress and minor details of conduct. They cannot
marry out of their class. Once a year they are sent
out into the forests, the mountains, or the waste places
to shift for themselves; they go “bookless and weaponless,
without pen or paper, or money”; and they come
back again with a new hardness and fineness and fortification
of spirit. It is such an organization as might
have been evolved at the time of the Reformation had
the Order of Jesuits been able to effect a dictatorship
of Christendom. I say this without disparagement of
either the Jesuits or the Samurai, in order to point
out that these guardians of A Modern Utopia are plausible
historic characters. All the important economic
and political enterprises of the state, and important
vocations like that of the physician, are in the hands of
Samurai. They are as necessary to the social organization
of A Modern Utopia as the research laboratories,
which are provided by charter with each factory, are
necessary to its industrial organization.
The glimpses that one gets of this utopia are full of
color and light and movement; there are finely contained
cities, surrounded by wide suburban territories, cities
that are not built of paper and alabaster. Lovers
pass arm in arm through the streets in the twilight;
and there is a soft dignity in the women, with their
gay, sexually unemphatic dresses, that charms. There
are electric trains weaving silently on rails over the
landscape of Europe, crossing under the English Channel
by tube, and emerging in London with none of the
bustle, the grinding, or the dirt of a modern railway
ride. There are well-cultivated fields and adequate
inns. There are no obstreperous patriotisms, as one
suspects in Looking Backward; there is none of the
shirking one might fear in News from Nowhere. (While
our travellers are waiting to be identified they stay
for a while in a residential quadrangle at Lucerne, and
are given employment in a toy workshop.) There is
less dogmatism about creeds than in Christianopolis,
and an entire absence of menialism which contrasts with
More’s Utopia.
This modern utopia brings together, compares, and
criticizes important points that all the other utopias
have raised; and it does all this with a deftness and a
turn of humor that speaks for Mr. Wells at his best.
Above all, A Modern Utopia strikes a new note, the
note of reality, the note of the daily world from which
we endeavor in vain to escape. More or less, all the
other utopias assume that a change has come over the
population; that it has been diminished; that the blind,
the lame, and the deaf have been cured; that the mean
sensual man has been converted and is ready to flap
his wings and sing Hallelujah! There is a minimum
of these assumptions in A Modern Utopia. It is above
all other things an accounting and a criticism; and so
it forms a fitting prelude to the remainder of this book.
CHAPTER TEN
How the Country House and Coketown became the
utopias of the Modern Age; and how they made
the world over in their image.
Now that we have ransacked the literature of ideal
commonwealths for examples of the utopian vision and
the utopian method, there remains another class of
utopias which has still to be reckoned with, in order to
make our tally complete.
All the utopias that we have dealt with so far have
been filtered through an individual mind, and whereas,
like any other piece of literature, they grew out of a
certain age and tradition of thought, it is dangerous to
overrate their importance either as mirrors of the existing
order or as projectors of a new order. While again
and again the dream of a utopian in one age has become
the reality of the next, as O’Shaughnessy sings in his
famous verses, the exact connection between the two
can only be guessed at, and rarely, I suppose, can it
be traced. It would be a little foolish to attempt to
prove that the inventor of the modern incubator was a
student of Sir Thomas More.
Up to the present the idola which have exercised the
most considerable influence upon the actual life of the
community are such as have been partly expressed in a
hundred works and never perhaps fully expressed in
one. In order to distinguish these idola from those
that have occupied us till now, we should perhaps call
them collective utopias or social myths. There is a
considerable literature that relates to these myths
in French, one of the best known works being M. George
Sorel’s Reflections on Violence; and in practice it is
sometimes rather hard to tell where the Utopia leaves
off and the social myth begins.
The history of mankind’s social myths has still in
the main to be written. There is a partial attempt at
this over a limited period in Mr. Henry Osborn Taylor’s
The Mediæval Mind; but this is only a beginning,
and other ages are almost untouched. The type of
myth that concerns us here is not the pure action myth
which M. Sorel has analyzed; we are rather interested
in those myths which are, as it were, the ideal content of
the existing order of things, myths which, by being
consciously formulated and worked out in thought, tend
to perpetuate and perfect that order. This type of
social myth approaches very closely to the classic
utopia, and we could divide it, similarly, into myths
of escape and myths of reconstruction. Thus the myth
of political freedom, for example, as formulated by the
writers of the American revolution, frequently serves
as an excellent refuge for disturbed consciences when
the Department of Justice or the Immigration Bureau
has been a little too assiduous in its harassment of political
agitators.
Unfortunately, it has become a habit to look upon
our idola as particularly fine and exalted, and as representing
the better side of human nature. As a matter
of fact, the myths which are created in a community
under religious, political, or economic influences cannot
be characterized as either good or bad: their nature is
defined by their capacity to help men to react creatively
upon their environment and to develop a humane life.
We have still to recognize that a belief in these idola
is not by itself a creditable attitude. Even quite base
and stupid people are frequently governed by ideals;
indeed, it is the ideals that are in many cases responsible
for their baseness and stupidity. Neither is the habit
of responding to idola any evidence of rational thought.
People respond to “ideas”—that is, to word-patterns—as
they respond to the stimulus of light or heat, because
they are human beings and not because they are philosophers,
and they respond to projections, to idola, for
the same reason, and not because they are saints. Our
myths may be the outcome of rational thought and
practice or not; but the response to these myths is
not perhaps more than ten times in a hundred the result
of following the processes of reason from beginning
to end.
We must think of our idola as a sort of diffused environment
or atmosphere, which differs in “chemical
content” and in extension with each individual. Some
of these idola have so uniformly taken possession of
men’s minds in a particular age that they are as much
a part of the environment a baby is born into as the
furniture of his house. The sociologists who follow
Émile Durkheim have called a certain part of these
idola collective representations but they are wrong,
I believe, when they limit these “representations” to
savage or ignorant groups for they are an important
part of every civilized person’s luggage. Parallel with
The Story of Mankind and with The Story of Utopias,
which I have just told, it would be amusing to write
The Story of Mankind’s Myths. This work, however,
would require the scholarship and industry of another
Leibniz, and all that I wish to do here is to put together
the chief social myths that have played a part in Western
Europe and America during the modern period, to
contrast these idola with the utopias of the past and the
partial remedies for the present, and to suggest the
bearing of all this upon any new departures we may
be ready to make.
In selecting these idola—The Country House, Coketown,
the Megalopolis—I have been forced to gauge
their strength and test their quality very largely by
their actual results in the workaday world, and it is a
little hard to purify them from the various institutions,
old and new, in which they are mixt. Yet with all this
taint of actuality, these idola are scarcely as credible
as the Republic and it will help matters a little to
realize that we are still within the province of utopia,
and may exercise all the utopian privileges.
To understand the utopia of the Country House we
must jump back a few centuries in history.
Anyone who has ranged through the European castles
that were built before the fourteenth century will
realize that they were no more built for comfort than
is a modern battleship. They were essentially garrisons
of armed men whose main occupation was theft,
violence, and murder; and every feature of their environment
reflected the necessities of their life. These
castles would be found beetling a cliff or a steep hill;
their walls and their buttresses would be made of huge,
rough hewn stones; their living arrangements would
resemble those of a barracks with an almost complete
lack of what we now regard as the normal decencies and
privacies, except possibly for the lord and his lady;
and the life of these feudal bands was necessarily a
crude and limited one.
Up to the fourteenth century in Western Europe the
little fortified town, or the unfortified town that lay
beneath the protection of a garrison on a hill, was the
only other social unit that competed with the even
more limited horizons of the peasant’s village, or with
the spacious claims for the Here and the Hereafter
which were put forward by the Roman Church. To
dream of huge metropolises and farflung armies and
food brought from the ends of the earth would have
been wilder in those days than anything More pictured
in his Utopia.
During the fifteenth century in England, and in
other parts of Europe the same thing seems to have
happened sooner or later, this life of agriculture and
warfare and petty trade was upset: the feudal power of
the reigning nobles was concentrated in the hands of
a supreme lord, the King; and the King and his archives
and his court settled in the National Capital, instead
of moving about from place to place in the troubled
realm. The territories of the feudal lords ceased to
be dispersed; their possessions were confined more and
more within what were called national boundaries; and
instead of remaining in their castles the great lords
gave up their crude, barbaric ways, and went up to the
capital to be civilized. In the course of time money
took the place of direct tribute; instead of receiving
wheat and eggs and labor, the lord came into possession
of a rent which could be figured in pence and pounds;
a rent which could be transferred to the new trading
cities for the goods which the rest of the world had
for sale. There is a fascinating picture of this change
in W. J. Ashley’s Economic History; and the old life
itself is outlined, with a wealth of significant detail, in
J. S. Fletcher’s Memorials of a Yorkshire Parish.
At the same time that this change was taking place
in the physical life of Western Europe, a corresponding
change was taking place in the domain of culture.
Digging about the ruins of Rome and other cities, the
men of the late Middle Age discovered the remains of a
great and opulent civilization; and exploring the manuscripts
and printed books which were getting into general
circulation, they found themselves face to face
with strange conceptions of life, with habits of refinement,
ease, and sensuous luxury which the hard life
of the camp and the castle had never really permitted.
There followed a reaction against their old life which
was little less than a revulsion; and in that reaction
two great institutions fell out of fashion. Men ceased to
build castles to protect themselves against physical
dangers; and they left off entering monasteries in order
to fortify their souls for the Hereafter. Both the
spiritual and the temporal life began to shift to a
new institution, the Country House. The idolum of
the Country House drew together and coalesced; and
as a familiar symbol of this change the colleges at
Oxford which date from the Renascence can scarcely be
distinguished in architectural detail from the palaces
which the aristocracy were building in the same period;
while our banks and our political edifices to this day
bear almost universally the stamp of that Roman and
Grecian litter which men discovered on the outskirts
of the mediæval city.
We do not know the Country House until we realize,
to begin with, what its physical characteristics are
like. There are a great many descriptions which the
reader may consult if he does not happen to live in the
neighborhood of a great Country House: but perhaps
instead of examining the contemporary Country House
it will be well to go back to its beginnings, and see how
it was pictured in all its encrusted splendor at the first
movement of the Renascence—in the setting which François
Rabelais, in one of the few downright serious passages
in his great work, Gargantua, sought to provide
for the good life.
Gargantua purposes to build a new Abbey which he
calls the Abbey of Theleme. This Abbey is to be in
every respect what the mediæval Abbey was not. Hence
to begin with, the Abbey, unlike the castle, is to lie
in the midst of the open country; and unlike the monastery,
it is to have no walls. Every member is to be
furnished with a generous apartment, consisting of a
principal room, a withdrawing room, a handsome closet,
a wardrobe, and an oratory; and the house itself is
to contain not merely libraries in every language, but
fair and spacious galleries of paintings. Besides these
lodgings there is to be a tilt-yard, a riding court, a
theatre, or public playhouse, and a natatory or place
to swim. By the river, for the Abbey is to be situated
on the Loire, there is to be a Garden of Pleasure, and
between two of the six towers of the hexagon, in which
form the building is arranged, there are courts for
tennis and other games. Add to this orchards full of
fruit trees, parks abounding with venison, and an archery
range, fill all the halls and chambers with rich
tapestries, cover all the pavements and floors with
green cloth—and the furnishing of the Abbey of
Theleme is complete.
The costumes of the inmates are equally splendid
and elaborate. In order to have the accoutrements of
the ladies’ and gentlemen’s toilets more convenient, there
was to be “about the wood of Theleme a row of houses
to the extent of half a league, very neat and cleanly,
wherein dwelt the goldsmiths, lapidaries, jewellers, embroiderers,
tailors, gold drawers, velvet weavers, tapestry
makers, and upholsterers....” They were to
be “furnished with matter and stuff from the hands of
Lord Nausiclete, who every year brought them seven
ships from the Perlas and Cannibal Islands, laden with
ingots of gold, with raw silk, with pearls and precious
stones.”
The women who are admitted to Theleme must be
fair, well-featured, and of sweet disposition; the men
must be comely and well-conditioned. Everyone is to
be admitted freely and allowed to depart freely; and
instead of attempting to practice poverty, chastity, and
obedience, the inmates may be honorably married, may
be rich, and may live at liberty.
The liberty of Theleme is indeed complete; it is such
a liberty as one enjoys at a Country House to this day,
under the care of a tactful hostess; for everyone does
nothing except follow his own free will and pleasure,
rising out of his bed whenever he thinks good, and
eating, drinking, and laboring when he has a mind to
it. In all their rule and strictest tie of their order, as
Rabelais puts it, there is but one clause to be observed—
“Do what you please.”
When we turn our attention from Rabelais’ conceit
of an anti-monastic order, we discover that he has
given us an excellent picture of the Country House,
and of what I shall take the liberty of calling Country
House culture. We see pretty much the same outlines
in the introduction to Boccaccio’s Decameron; it is
elaborately described in terms of that most complete of
Country Houses, Hampton Court, in Pope’s Rape of the
Lock; it is vividly pictured by Meredith in his portrait
of The Egoist; and it is analyzed in Mr. H. G. Wells’
cruel description of Bladesover in Tono-Bungay, as
well as by Mr. Bernard Shaw in Heartbreak House.
Whether Mr. W. H. Mallock holds the pattern of
Country House culture up to us in The New Republic
or Anton Chekhov penetrates its aimlessness and futility
in The Cherry Orchard, The Country House is one
of the recurrent themes of literature.
This renascence idolum of the Country House, then,
is powerful and complete: I know no other pattern
which has imposed its standards and its practices with
such complete success upon the greater part of European
civilization. While the Country House was in the
beginning an aristocratic institution, it has penetrated
now to every stratum of society; and although we may
not immediately see the connection, it is responsible, I
believe, for the particular go and direction which the
industrial revolution has taken. The Country House
standards of consumption are responsible for our Acquisitive
Society.
Perhaps the shortest way to suggest the character
of Country House institutions is to say that they are
the precise opposite of everything that Plato looked
upon as desirable in a good community.
The Country House is concerned not with the happiness
of the whole community but with the felicity of the
governors. The conditions which underly this limited
and partial good life are political power and economic
wealth; and in order for the life to flourish, both of
these must be obtained in almost limitless quantities.
The chief principles that characterize this society are
possession and passive enjoyment.
Now, in the Country House possession is based upon
privilege and not upon work. The title to land which
was historically obtained for the most part through
force and fraud is the economic foundation of the Country
House existence. In order to keep the artisans and
laborers who surround the Country House at their
work, it is necessary to keep them from having access
to the land on their own account, provision always
being made that the usufruct of the land shall go to
the owner and not to the worker. This emphasis upon
passive ownership points to the fact that in the Country
House there is no active communion between the
people and their environment. Such activities as remain
in the Country House—the pursuit of game, for
instance—rest upon imitating in play activities which
once had a vital use or prepared for some vital function,
as a child’s playing with a doll is a preparation for
motherhood. The Country House ideal is that of a
completely functionless existence; or at best, an existence
in which all the functions that properly belong
to a civilized man shall be carried on by functionaries.
Since this ideal cannot be realized in the actual world,
for the reason that it is completely at odds with man’s
biological inheritance, it is necessary in the Country
House utopia to fill in by play and sport an otherwise
desirable vacuity.
In the Country House literature and the fine arts
undoubtedly flourish: but they flourish as the objects
of appreciation rather than as the active, creative
elements in the community’s life; they flourish particularly
in the fashion that Plato looked upon as a corrupting
influence in the community. In the arts, a
gourmandizing habit of mind—the habit of receiving
things and being played upon by them—prevails; so
that instead of the ability to share creative ecstasy,
the chief canon of judgment is “taste,” a certain capacity
to discriminate among sensory stimuli, a capacity
which is essentially just as hospitable to a decomposing
cheese as to the very staff of life. The effect of this
gourmandism in the arts can be detected in every element
of the Country House from cellar to roof; for the
result has been to emphasize the collection of good
things rather than their creation, and there is an aspect
in which the Country House is little better than a
robber’s hoard or a hunter’s cache—a miniature anticipation
of the modern museums of natural history and
art.
Observe the architecture of our Country House. If
it has been built in England during the last three hundred
years, the style is probably that bastard Greek
or Roman which we call Renascence architecture; if the
Country House was built in America during the last
thirty years, it is as likely as not a Tudor residence
with traces of castle fortification left here and there
on the façade. On the walls there will be plenty of
paintings; indeed a whole gallery may be devoted to
them. In all probability, however, the paintings have
been created in other times by men long since dead,
and in other countries: there may be a portrait by
Rembrandt, a Persian miniature, a print by Hokusai.
Some very fine element in the structure, a fireplace or
a bit of panelling, may have been removed piece by
piece from the original Country House in England,
Italy, or France; even as many features of the original
Country House were quarried, perhaps, from some
mediæval abbey. The very china that we use upon our
tables nowadays is a Country House importation which
took the place of pewter and earthenware; and wall
paper is another importation. From feature to feature
everything is derivative; everything, in the last analysis,
has either been stolen or purchased from the original
makers; and what has not been stolen or purchased
has been basely copied.
The insatiability of the Country House to possess
art is only equalled by its inability to create it. In
the Country House, the arts are not married to the
community, but are kept for its pleasure.
Let there be no confusion as to either the facts or
the ideal we are examining. There is a vast difference
between that fine mingling of traditions which is the
very breath of the arts, as the lover of classic Greek
statuary knows, and the rapacious imperialistic habit
of looting the physical objects of art which has been
the essence of the Country House method in modern
times, even as it seems to have been a couple of thousand
years ago in the Roman villa. A genuine culture
will borrow steadily from other cultures; but it will
go to them as the bee goes to the flower for pollen, and
not as the beekeeper goes to the hive for honey. There
is a creative borrowing and a possessive borrowing; and
the Country House has in the main limited itself to
possessive borrowing. The Country House ideal, in
fact, is limitless possession: so the great Country House
masters have five or six houses, perhaps, in their name,
although they need but a single one to cover their
heads.
Now the Country House idolum involves a dissociation
between the Country House and the community in
which it is placed. If you will take the trouble to
examine mediæval conditions, you will find that differences
of rank and wealth did not make a very great
difference between the life of the lord in his castle, and
his retainers: if the common man could not claim to be
as good as his lord, it is plain that the lord shared
most of the common man’s disabilities, and was, for all
the exaggerations of chivalry, just as ignorant, just
as illiterate, just as coarse. In the cities, too, the lowest
workman in the guild shared the institutions of his
masters: the churches, the guild pageants, and the
morality plays were all part and parcel of the same
culture.
The Country House changed this condition. Culture
came to mean not a participation in the creative activities
of one’s own community, but the acquisition of
the products of other communities; and it scarcely matters
much whether these acquisitions were within the
spiritual or the material domain. There had of course
been the beginnings of such a split in mediæval literature,
with its vulgar Rabelaisian tales and its refined
romances of the court; but with the integration of the
Country House idolum, this divorcement was accentuated
in every other activity of the community. One
of the results of this split was that popular institutions
were deprived of their contacts with the general
world of culture, and languished away; or they were
transformed, as the public schools of England were
transformed into restricted upper class institutions.
Far more important than this, perhaps, was the fact
that each separate Country House was forced to obtain
for its limited circle all the elements that were
necessary to the good life in a whole community such
as Plato described. We shall deal with the effects of
this presently.
Let us admit what is valid in the utopia of the
Country House. Enjoyment is a necessary element in
achievement, and by its regard for the decent graces
of life, for such things as an ease in manners and a
fine flow of conversation and the clash of wits and a
sensitiveness to beautiful things, the Country House
was by all odds a humanizing influence. In so far as
the Country House fostered a belief in contemplation
and a desire for the arts apart from any uses that
might be made of them by way of civic advertisement;
in so far as it urged that all our pragmatic activities
must be realized in things that are worth having or
doing for themselves, the Country House was right,
eminently right. It was no snobbery on the part of
Russian soviet officialism when it opened up some of
its Country Houses as rest houses for the peasants and
workers, and then insisted that some of the airs of the
Country House should be acquired there, to replace
the rough usages of the stable, the dungpile, and the
field. Ruskin and Samuel Butler were possibly right
when they insisted that the perfect gentleman was a
finer product than the perfect peasant or artisan:
he is a finer product because he is essentially more alive.
Even by its emphasis upon appreciation the Country
House did no mean service; for it called attention to
the fact that there were more permanent standards—standards
which were common to the arts of Greece and
China—than those which were looked upon as sufficient
in the local region. In sum, the Country House
emphasized a human best, which was the sum of a
dozen partial perfections; and so all that was crude
and inadequate in the old regional cultures was brought
to light and criticized. All these virtues I admit;
and they hold just as good today as they ever did.
The fatal weakness of Country House culture comes
out all the plainer for this admission. The Country
House did not see that enjoyment rested upon achievement,
and was indeed inseparable from achievement.
The Country House strove to put achievement in one
compartment and enjoyment in another; with the result
that the craftsman who no longer had the capacity to
enjoy the fine arts no longer had the ability to create
them. The effect of an isolated routine of enjoyment
is equally debilitating; for enjoyment, to the masters
of the Country House came too easily, with a mere
snap of the fingers, as it were, and the tendency of
connoisseurship was to set novelty above intrinsic
worth. Hence the succession of styles by which Country
House decoration has become a thing for mockery:
Chinese in one age, Indian in another, Persian in the
next, with Egyptian, Middle African, and heaven knows
what else destined to follow in due order. There is
nothing to settle to, because there is no task to be done,
and no problem to work out; and as soon as the first
taste for a style gets exhausted it is speedily supplanted
by another.
It would be impossible to calculate the extent to which
the Country House has degraded our taste but I have
little doubts as to the source of the degradation. The
stylicism which has perverted the arts and has kept a
congruent modern style from developing has been the
work of Country House culture. I remember well the
contempt with which a furniture manufacturer in the
Chiltern Hills told me about the way in which he
produced an original Sheraton: his knowledge of sound
furniture design was subordinated to some other person’s
knowledge of “style” and the miscarriage of the
man’s innate craftsmanship made him so mordant on
the subject that it seemed as though he had been reading
Thorstein Veblen’s Theory of the Leisure Class.
It is the same through all the arts. A visit to the industrial
sections of the Metropolitan Museum in New
York will show how dismally the taste for novelty,
which led the Sheratons and Chippendales to find
“classic motifs” in one age, causes the designers of
the present day to seek the motifs of Sheraton and
Chippendale. So much for what happened to the arts
when enjoyment and achievement are separated.
The industrial bearing of the Renascence ideal is
of capital importance.
During the Middle Age the emphasis in industry was
upon the production of tangible goods; the craft guilds
set high standards in design and workmanship; and
the aim of the worker, in most of the trades, was to get
a living from his work, and not simply to get enough
money to free himself from the necessity of working.
This is a broad generalization, I need scarcely emphasize,
and there is plenty of evidence of pecuniary interests
under the best of conditions; but it seems fair to
say that the dominant ideals of the older industrial
order were industrial rather than commercial. In the
trading ventures that the Country House promoted
under its Drakes and Raleighs, ventures which were
needed to bring them “Ships from the Perlas and
Cannibal Islands,” the emphasis shifted from workmanship
to sale; and the notion of working and gambling to
acquire multifarious goods took the place of that earlier
ideal which Henry Adams so sympathetically described
in Mt. St. Michel and Chartres. Thus the good
life, as I have said elsewhere, was the Goods Life: it
could be purchased. If the whole community no longer
offered the conditions for this life, one might filch
what one wanted from the general store, and try to
monopolize for self or family all that was needed for
a good life in the community.
What is the chief economic outcome of this ideal?
The chief outcome, I think, is to exaggerate the demand
for goods, and to cause an enormously wasteful duplication
of the apparatus of consumption. If the limit
to one’s possessions should be simply the extent of
one’s purse; if happiness is to be acquired through obtaining
the comforts and luxuries of life; if a man who
possesses a single house is considered fortunate, and a
man who possesses five houses five times as fortunate;
if there are no standards of living other than the insatiable
one that has been set up in the Country House—well,
then there is really no limit to the business of
getting and spending, and our lives become the mean
handiwork of coachman, cook, and groom. Our Country
House will not merely be a house: there will be a chapel,
an art gallery, a theater, a gymnasium, as François
Rabelais imagined. As the common possessions of the
community dwindle, the private possessions of individuals
are multiplied; and at last, there remains no other
community than a multitude of anarchic individuals,
each of whom is doing his best to create for himself a
Country House, notwithstanding the fact that the net
result of his endeavors—this is the drab tragedy and
the final thing to be said against it—is perhaps nothing
better than six inadequate rooms at the end of nowhere
in a Philadelphia suburb.
The Country House, then, is the chief pattern by
means of which the mediæval order was transformed
into the modern order. It does not matter very much
whether the Country House is an estate on Long Island
or a cottage in Montclair; whether it is a house in
Golder’s Green or a family manor in Devonshire: these
are essentially affairs of scale, and the underlying identity
is plain enough. The idolum of the Country House
prevails even when quarters are taken up in the midst
of the metropolis. More than ever the Country House
today tries to make up by an abundance of physical
goods for all that has been lost through its divorce
from the underlying community; more than ever it
attempts to be self-sufficient within the limits of suburbia.
The automobile, the phonograph, and the radio-telephone
have only served to increase this self-sufficiency;
and I need not show at length how these instrumentalities
have deepened the elements of acquisitiveness
and passive, uncreative, mechanical enjoyment.
The Country House’s passionate demand for physical
goods has given rise to another institution, Coketown;
and it is the idolum of Coketown, the industrial age’s
contribution to the Country House, that we have now
to consider.
The chief difference between the individual utopias
of the nineteenth century and the “collective representation”
of Coketown is that these individual utopias were
concerned to repair certain points where Manchester,
Newark, Pittsburgh, and Elberfeld-Barmen fell short
of the ideal. In repairing these points, Bellamy and
Hertzka were ready to alter the conventional arrangements
by which property and land were held, and capital
was accumulated. The final end however was the same;
and the differences are therefore more apparent than
real.
If the illustrative example of the Country House is
in the Abbey of Theleme, that of Coketown is in the
sharp picture of industrialism which Charles Dickens
presents in Hard Times.
Coketown, as Dickens sees it, is the quintessence of
the industrial age. It is perhaps one of the few idola
of the modern world which has no parallel in any earlier
civilization that we have been able to explore. In order
to understand what Coketown brought into the world,
we must realize that before Coketown came into existence
the center of every important European city consisted
of a marketplace, shadowed over by a Cathedral,
a Market Court, and a Guildhall; and frequently there
would be an adjacent university. This was the typical
formation. The various quarters of the city were
subordinated to these central institutions, and the
work which was carried on within the city’s walls was
more or less concretely realized in the local community.
Coketown, on the other hand, was the outcome of
other conditions and necessities. The center of Coketown’s
activity was the mill, set at first in the open
country near falling water, and then as coal was
applied to steam engines, removed to areas more accessible
to the coal fields. The factory became the new
social unity; in fact it became the only social unit;
and, as Dickens sharply put it, “the jail looked like
the town hall, and the town hall like the infirmary”—and
all of them looked like the factory, a gaunt building
of murky brick that once was red or yellow. The
sole object of the factory is to produce goods for sale;
and every other institution is encouraged in Coketown
only to the extent that it does not seriously interfere
with this aim.
What are the outward physical aspects of Coketown?
To begin with, the city is laid out by an engineer;
it is laid out with a mathematical correctness and
with a complete disregard for the amenities. If there
are hills where Coketown ought to stand, the hills are
leveled; if there are swamps, the swamps are filled; if
there are lakes, the lakes are drained away. The pattern
to which Coketown’s activities are fitted is that of
the gridiron; there are no deviations and no allowances
in the working out of this plan; never will a street
swerve as much as a hair’s breadth to save a stand of
trees or open up a vista. In the matter of transportation
and intercourse, the aim of Coketown is to “get
somewhere”; and it fancies that by laying down
straight lines and joining them in rectangles this aim is
expedited; despite the demonstration in every city of
older growth that a radial system of intercommunication
is much more economical than the gridiron. As a
result, there is no terminus to any of the avenues of
Coketown; for they begin on a draughting board and
end in infinity. It is impossible to approach from the
front the jails, hospitals, and sanatoria of which Coketown
boasts; the tendency is to run past them. So
much for the physical layout of the industrial city;
what remains is obscured by smoke.
The factory is the center of Coketown’s social life;
and it is here that the greater part of the population
spend their days. At its purest, that is to say, during
the first half of the nineteenth century, and in a great
many centers to this day, the factory is the only institution
that provides anything like a social life, in spite
of the fact that the unremitting toil which accompanies
its routine reduces the graces of social intercourse to
such a minimum that drunkenness and copulation are
the only amusements which the inhabitants can engage
in as a relief from their noble duty of providing the
rest of the world with necessities, comforts, luxuries,
and nullities.
The Coketown idolum has been disintegrating a little
during the last two decades, under the influence of the
garden cities movement, and I am aware that in certain
departments I am celebrating a lost cause and an abandoned
idealism; but there still remain in acres and acres
of workingmen’s dwellings, such as one finds in Battersea
and Philadelphia, and in old-fashioned railway
stations, and in buildings like the Mechanics Halls of
Pittsburgh and Boston, a notion of what Coketown
stood for when Coketown, the Frankenstein which had
been created by the Country House, had not been repudiated
by its master.
Coketown is devoted to the production of material
goods; and there is no good in Coketown that does not
derive from this aim. The only enjoyment which those
who are inured to the Coketown routine can participate
in is mechanical achievement; that is to say, activity
along industrial and commercial lines; and the only
result of this achievement is—more achievement. It
follows that all the standards of Coketown are of a
quantitative kind; so many score of machines, so many
tons of gew-gaws, so many miles of piping, so many
dollars of profit. The opportunities for self-assertion
and constructiveness in such a community are practically
boundless; and I can never confront the mechanical
felicities of a printing plant without realizing how
fascinating these opportunities are, and how deeply
they satisfy certain elements in our nature. The unfortunate
thing about Coketown, however, is that these
are the only sort of opportunities that are available;
and work whose standards are of a qualitative sort, the
work of scholars and artists and scientists, is either
frozen out of the community by deliberate ostracism,
or is hitched to the machine; the artist, for example,
being compelled to sing the praises of Coketown’s goods
or to paint the portrait of Coketown’s supreme esthetic
achievement—the Self-Made Man.
In its pristine state, Coketown is not a complete community.
So it is natural that the idolum should have
provided certain additions. In the first place, the
activities of Coketown, whether they are beneficial or
wasteful, satisfy only certain elements in the human
makeup; and although much may be done by compulsory
education to discipline the younger generation to
the machine, and to show them the necessity of doing
nothing which would interfere with the continued activity
of the machine—for work in Coketown, as Samuel
Butler fearfully predicted in Erewhon, is in the main
simply attendance upon machinery—here and there
the igneous instincts of the workers will break through
the solidified layer of habit which the school and the
factory have produced, and the arcane energies of
the population will flow either into the Country House
or into that other simulacrum of the civic life, Broadway.
Coketown for the workaday week, the Country House
for the weekend, is the compromise that has been practically
countenanced; although the country houses of the
working classes may be nothing more than a diminutive
extension of the urban slum near sea or mountain. But
it must be admitted that there is a permanent Country
House and a permanent Coketown population in the
more ideal aspects of the order. Mr. Wells in the
Time Machine has given a picture of Coketown which
is perhaps a little exuberant in some of its details—the
picture of a happy and careless Country House
population, living on the surface of the earth, mid all
the graces of a jolly weekend, and that of the factory
population, the Morlocks, living in the bowels of the
earth and performing the necessary industrial functions.
Mr. Wells’ presentation is a little exaggerated,
however, and we must be content here with such a plain
and outright description as Messrs. Bounderby and
Gradgrind would approve of.
In the Coketown scheme of things, all that does not
contribute to the physical necessities of life is called a
comfort; and all that does not contribute either to comforts
or necessities is called a luxury. These three
grades of good correspond to the three classes of the
population: the necessities are for the lower order of
manual workers, together with such accessory members
as clerks, teachers, and minor officials; the comforts are
for the comfortable classes, that is, the small order of
merchants, bankers, and industrialists; while the luxuries
are for the aristocracy, if there is such an hereditary
group, and for such as are able to lift themselves
out of the two previous orders. Chief among the luxuries,
it goes without saying, are art and literature and
any of the other permanent interests of a humane life.
Let us note what an improvement the three classes
of Coketown are upon the three classes in Plato’s
Republic. The custom of limiting the earnings of the
working classes to the margin of subsistence is
singularly effective in keeping them occupied with the
business of production—as long as there is no overplus
in the market to throw them out of work—and it
is thus a safeguard of efficiency and industry which
Plato, who was deplorably obtuse in these matters, did
not provide. It is likewise obvious that the life of a
middle class citizen, with plenty to eat and drink, with
his life protected by the policeman, his pocketbook protected
by the insurance company, his spiritual happiness
protected by the church, his human sympathies
protected by the charity organization society, his intelligence
protected by the newspaper, and his economic
privileges protected by the State—this middle class
citizen is, after all, a much more fortunate and happy
individual than those Platonic warriors whose life was
a perpetual effort to keep the edge on their bodies and
minds. As for the Guardians of the State, it is plain
that Plato did not offer them any inducement to do
their work which would attract a normal commercial
man: anyone who was worth a hundred thousand dollars
a year would have thought twice before assuming
leadership in Plato’s impoverished commonwealth,
whereas in Coketown he would find that his simple ability
to make money would be taken as sufficient proof
of his education, his insight, and his wisdom in every
department of life. More than that, Coketown, when
all is said and done, welcomes the artist with a cordiality
that puts Plato to shame: Coketown can afford its
luxuries since, when you look at the matter squarely,
a rare painting might be worth as much as a rare postage
stamp; and it is accordingly an acceptable addition
to the Coketown milieu.
Coketown has, in fact, only one question for the arts
to answer: What are they good for? If the answer
can be expressed in money, the art in question is taken
to be almost as satisfactory as a device to save labor, to
increase speed, or to multiply the output.
There is one phenomenon still to be accounted for in
the economy of Coketown; one monumental instrument
without which the wheels of Coketown would become
clogged and the very breath of Coketown be extinguished.
I refer to the rubbish heaps.
The aim of production in Coketown is naturally more
production, and it is only by making things sufficiently
shoddy to go to pieces quickly, or by changing the
fashion sufficiently often, that the machinery of Coketown
can for the most part be kept running. The rage
and fury of Coketown’s production has to be balanced
off by an equal rage and fury of consumption—continence
would be fatal. As a result, nothing in Coketown
is finished or permanent or settled: these qualities
are another name for death. Coketown makes china to
be broken, clothes to be worn out, and houses to be torn
down; and if something remains over from an earlier
age which made things more soundly, it is either incarcerated
in a museum, and derided as the monument of
a non-progressive age, or it is demolished as a nuisance.
So powerful is the idolum of Coketown that in the
workaday world building after building continues to
meet with irreparable ruin at the hands of barbarians
from Coketown: why, I have even seen innocent little
half-timbered fifteenth century cottages whose fronts
were obliterated by a nineteenth century plasterer, in
the name of progress.
The status of every family in Coketown can be told
by the size of its rubbish heap. In fact, to “make a
pile” in the markets of Coketown is ultimately to make
another pile—of dust and junk and litter—on the edge
of the town where the factory district dribbles off into
the open country. So in Coketown consumption is not
merely a necessity: it is a social duty, a means of keeping
“the wheels of civilization turning.” At times there
appears to be a possibility that this utopia may defeat
its purposes by producing goods at such a pace that
the rubbish heaps will fall behind the demands of the
market; and while this mars the theoretic perfection
of the Coketown social organization, it is offset by
periods of war, when the market is practically inexhaustible,
and Coketown’s prosperity increases to a
point at which the working classes are on the point of
becoming the comfortable classes without having had
sufficient previous training to make their contribution
to the rubbish heap—a serious pass, amidst which confusion
the working classes of Coketown might take to
reducing their working days and enjoying their leisure
without sufficient consumptive effort.
This, then, is the idolum of Coketown. There are
certain features in it which need to be noticed. The
first is that there is a certain solid reality in Coketown
that remains when all its pretensions and idiocies have
been incinerated. An environment that is devoted solely
to the production of material goods is obviously no sort
of environment for a good community, for life is more
than a matter of finding what we shall eat and wherewithal
we shall be clothed: it is an interaction with a
whole world of landscapes, living creatures and ideas,
in comparison with which Coketown is a mere blister
on the earth’s surface. Nevertheless, with respect to
the business of melting steel and building roads and
performing certain essential industrial operations, the
aims of Coketown are, up to a certain point, relevant:
we have already encountered them in Andreæ’s Christianopolis.
There is no need to dismiss the good that
lies inside of industrialism because it does not embrace
the good that lies beyond it.
Up to a certain point, then, using mechanical power
rather than human power is good; so is large-scale production,
so is the division of labor and division of operation;
so is rapid transportation; so is the accurate
methodology of the engineer; and so are various other
features in the modern industrial world. One might
even say a word for efficiency, as against “doing things
rather more or less.” Coketown made the horrid mistake
of believing that all these things were good in
themselves. New factories, for example, drew a bigger
population into the city: Coketown did not perceive
that, as Plato pointed out, beyond a certain point the
city as a social unit would cease to exist. Bigger and
better was Coketown’s motto; and it resolutely refused
to see that there was no necessary connection between
these adjectives. The whole case for and against Coketown
rests upon our admission of the phrase “up to a
certain point.” Up to a certain point, industrialism
is good, especially in its modern, neotechnic, electrical
phase: Coketown, on the other hand, believes that there
is no limit to the usefulness of industrialism.
Up to a certain point—but what point? The answer
is, up to the point at which the cultivation of a humane
life in a community of humane people becomes difficult
or impossible.
Men come together, says Aristotle, to live; they remain
together in order to live the good life. This
determination of the good life is the only check and
balance that we can have upon Coketown; and it is
perhaps because we have been so little concerned with
it that the practical effect of the Coketown idolum has
been so devastating. “Invention and organization,” as
Mr. George Santayana admirably points out, “which
ought to have increased leisure by producing the necessaries
of life with little labor, have only increased the
population, degraded labor, and diffused luxury.”
William Morris conceived that men in the future might
discard many complicated machines because they could
live more happily, aye, work more happily without
them. Whether indeed a good part of modern organization
and machinery could be scrapt is perhaps a
debatable question: but the possibility of scrapping it
is at least conceivable once we become more interested
in the actual result of industrialism upon the life and
happiness of the people who are part of the organization
than we are in the profits which pile up upon
paper, and are finally realized in an ever-growing
rubbish heap.
By what means can the Country House keep Coketown
working for it? The idolum of the Country
House, which was built up during the Renascence, and
the idolum of Coketown, which was formed in the early
part of the nineteenth century, are obviously two
separate worlds; and in order that each might be
realized in our daily life, it was necessary that some
connecting tissue be manufactured to keep them together.
This tissue was the social myth, the collective
utopia, of the National State.
There is a sense in which we may look upon the
National State as a fact; but that great philosopher
of the National State, Mazzini, realized that the
National State had continually to be willed; and its
existence lies plainly, therefore, on a different plane
from the existence of a bit of territory, a building, or
a city. In fact, it is only by the persistent projection
of this utopia for the last three or four hundred years
that its existence has become credible; for all the minute
descriptions which the political historian gives to the
National State, its origins and its institutions and its
people, read a good deal like that fine story which Hans
Andersen told about the king who walked the streets
naked because two rascally tailors had persuaded him
that they had woven and cut up for him a beautiful
outfit of clothes.
It will help us to appreciate this beautiful fabrication
of the National State if we turn aside for a moment and
glance at the actual world as it is known to the geographer
and the anthropologist. Here are the physical
facts in defiance of which the utopia of nationalism has
been clapped together.
The earth that the geographer surveys is divided into
five great land masses. These land masses in turn can
be broken up into a number of natural regions, each of
which has within its rough and approximate frontiers
a certain complex of soil, climate, vegetation, and, arising
out of these, certain primitive occupations which
the inhabitants of the region originally practiced and
later, through the advance of trade and invention,
elaborated. Between these natural regions there are
occasionally frontiers, such as the barrier of the Pyrenees
which separates “France” from “Spain”; but these
barriers have never altogether prevented movements of
population from one area to another. In order to have
a more faithful knowledge of regional groupings in
certain important areas, the reader might with profit
consult Professor Fleure’s Human Geography in Western
Europe. (London: Williams and Norgate.)
These natural regions are the groundwork of human
regions; that is, the non-political grouping of population
with respect to soil, climate, vegetation, animal life,
industry and historic tradition. In each of these human
regions we find that the population does not consist of
a multitude of atomic individuals: on the contrary,
when the geographer plots houses and buildings on a
topographic map, he finds that people and houses
cohere together in groups of more or less limited size,
called cities, towns, villages, hamlets. Normally, a vast
amount of intercourse takes place between these groupings;
and in the Middle Age, before the utopia of the
National State had been created, the pilgrim and the
wandering scholar and the journeyman and the strolling
player could have been met with on all the highways
of Europe. Under the dispensation of the National
State, however, the population, as the German
economist Buecher points out, tends to be more settled,
and we transport goods rather than people. It is important
to realize that, so far as the geographer can
discover, this trade and intercourse between local
groups has been a part of Western European civilization
since Neolithic times, at least: it takes place continually
between individuals and corporate groups in
one place and another, and as far as geographical facts
are concerned might more easily exist between Dover
and Calais, let us say, than between Calais and Paris.
Now the interesting thing about the utopia of the
National State is that it has only the most casual relation
to the facts of geography. Wherever it suits the
purposes of the Guardians of the State, the facts are
ignored, and an artificial relation is willed into existence.
The human communities which the regional
sociologist recognizes do not always coincide with those
which the statesman wishes to incorporate as “national
territory,” and when this conflict occurs, the idea
rather than the reality triumphs, if necessary by brute
force.
In the utopia of the National State there are no
natural regions; and the equally natural grouping of
people in towns, villages and cities, which, as Aristotle
points out, is perhaps the chief distinction between man
and the other animals, is tolerated only upon the fiction
that the State hands over to these groups a portion of
its omnipotent authority, or “sovereignty” as it is
called, and permits them to exercise a corporate life.
Unfortunately for this beautiful myth, which generations
of lawyers and statesmen have labored to build up,
cities existed long before states—there was a Rome on
the Tiber long before there was a Roman Imperium—and
the gracious permission of the state is simply a
perfunctory seal upon the accomplished fact.
Instead of recognizing natural regions and natural
groups of people, the utopia of nationalism establishes,
by the surveyor’s line, a certain realm called national
territory, and makes all the inhabitants of this territory
the members of a single, indivisible group, the
nation, which is supposed to be prior in claim and
superior in power to all other groups. This is the only
social formation that is officially recognized within the
national utopia. What is common to all the inhabitants
of this territory is thought to be of far greater
importance than any of the things that bind men together
in particular civic or industrial groups.
Let us look at this world of national utopias. The
contrast between the politician’s map and the geographer’s
would be little less than amazing were our eyes
not used to it, and were we not taught in modern times
to look upon it as inevitable. Instead of the natural
grouping of land masses and regions, one finds a multitude
of quite arbitrary lines: boundaries like those that
separate Canada and the United States or Belgium and
the Netherlands are just as frequent as the natural
frontier of sea that surrounds England. Sometimes
these national territories are big, and sometimes they
are little; but the bigness of empires like those of
France, England, or the United States is not due to
any essential identity of interests between the sundry
communities of these empires, but to the fact that they
are forcibly held together by a political government.
National lines, in other words, continue to exist only
as long as the inhabitants continue to act in terms of
them; are ready to pay their taxes to support customs
bureaux, immigration offices, frontier patrols, and
educational systems; and are prepared, in the last extremity,
to lay down their lives to prevent other groups
from crossing these imaginary lines without permission.
The chief concern of the national utopia is the support
of the central government, for the government is
the guardian of territory and privilege. The principal
business of that government is to keep the territory
properly defined, and to increase its limits, when possible,
so as to make the taxable area larger. By stressing
the importance of these concerns, and constantly
playing up the dangers of rivalry from other national
utopias, the State builds a bridge between the Country
House and Coketown, and persuades the workers in
Coketown that they have more in common with the
classes that exploit them than they have in common
with other groups within a more limited community.
It would seem that this reconciliation of Coketown and
the Country House is little less than miraculous, even
as an ideal; and perhaps it would be interesting to
examine a little more carefully the apparatus by which
this is effected.
The chief instrument of the National State is Megalopolis,
its biggest city, the place where the idolum of
the National Utopia was first created, and where it is
perpetually willed into existence.
In order to grasp the quintessential character of
Megalopolis we must shut our eyes to the palpable
earth, with its mantle of vegetation and its tent of
clouds, and conceive what might be made of the human
landscape if it could be entirely fabricated out of paper;
for the ultimate aim of the Megalopolis is to conduct
the whole of human life and intercourse through
the medium of paper.
The early life of a young citizen in Megalopolis is
spent in acquiring the tools by which paper may be
used. The names of these tools are writing, reading,
and arithmetic; and once upon a time these constituted
the main elements in every Megalopolitan’s education.
There was, however, a good deal of dissatisfaction, on
paper, against this somewhat barren curriculum, and
so at a fairly early date in the history of Megalopolis,
various other subjects, such as literature, science,
gymnastics, and manual training were added to the
curriculum—on paper. It is indeed possible for a
Megalopolitan student to know the atomic formula of
clay without ever having seen it in the raw earth, to
handle pine wood in the workshop without having
walked through a pine forest, and to go through the
masterpieces of poetic literature without having experienced
a single emotion which would prepare him to
appreciate anything different from one of the influential
Megalopolitan magazines, “Smutty Stories”, but
as long as his hours of attendance can be recorded on
paper, and as long as he can give a satisfactory
account of his studies on an examination paper, his
preparation for life is practically complete; and so he
is graduated with a paper certificate of education into
the industries of Coketown, or into the multitudinous
bureaus of Megalopolis itself.
The end of this period of paper tutelage is but a
prelude to its continuation in another form; for the
religious care of paper is the Megalopolitan’s life work.
The daily newspaper, the ledger, the card index are the
means by which he now makes contact with life, whilst
the fiction magazine and the illustrated paper are the
means by which he escapes from it. Through the translucent
form of paper known as celluloid, it has been
possible to do away on the stage with flesh-and-blood
people; and therefore the drama of life, as the Megalopolitan
story writers tell it, can be enacted at one
remove from actuality. Instead of his travelling, the
world moves before the Megalopolitan, on paper; instead
of his venturing forth on the highways of the
world, adventure comes to him, on paper; instead of
his getting him a mate, his bliss may be all but consummated—on
paper. In fact, so accustomed does the
Megalopolitan become to experiencing all his emotions
on paper that he can be entertained by the representation
of a static bowl of flowers on a moving picture
screen; while his cockney ignorance of nature is so vast
that a certain vaudeville performer, seeking to amuse
him by imitating the calls of birds and beasts, finds it
wise to have moving pictures taken of the rooster, the
dog, and the cat, in order to give his mimicries reality
in minds destitute of any personal image.
The notion of direct action, direct intercourse, direct
association, is a foreign one to Megalopolis. If any
action is to be taken by the whole community, or by
any group in it, it is necessary to carry it through the
Megalopolitan parliament, and have it established on
paper, after innumerable people, who have no genuine
concern in the matter, have committed their views about
it to paper. If any intercourse is to be carried on, it
must be largely conducted on paper; and if that medium
is not directly available, subsidiary instruments, like
the telephone, are used. The chief form of association
in Megalopolis is that by political party, and it is
through the political party that the Megalopolitan
expresses his views, on paper, as to what is necessary
to amend the paper constitution or promote the welfare
of the paper community; albeit he realizes that the
promises made by political parties are written on what
Megalopolitans in their more cynical moments call
“non-negotiable” paper, and will probably never pass
into currency.
By its traffic in Coketown’s multifarious goods and
by its command over certain kinds of paper known
as mortgages or securities, Megalopolis ensures a supply
of real foods and real staples from the countryside.
Through incessant production of books, magazines,
newspapers, boilerplate features, and syndicated matter,
Megalopolis ensures that the idolum of the National
Utopia shall be kept alive in the minds of the underlying
inhabitants of the country. Finally, by the devices
of “national education” and “national advertising”
all the inhabitants of the National Utopia are
persuaded that the good life is that which is lived, on
paper, in the capital city; and that an approximation
to this life can be achieved only by eating the food,
dressing in the clothes, holding the opinions, and purchasing
the goods which are offered for sale by Megalopolis.
So the chief aim of every other city in the
National Utopia is to become like Megalopolis; its chief
hope is to grow as big as Megalopolis; its boast is that
it is another Megalopolis. When the denizens of
Megalopolis dream of a better world, it is only a paper
perfection of that National Utopia which Edward Bellamy
looked forward to in Looking Backward.
Working in connection with the Machine Process of
Coketown, the Megalopolis erects a standard of life
which can be expressed in commercial terms, on paper,
even if it does not offer any tangible satisfaction in
goods and services and perfections. The chief boast
of this standard is its uniformity; that is, its equal
applicability to every person in the community without
respect to his history, his circumstances, his needs, his
actual rewards. Hence such goods as Megalopolis creates
in profusion are for the most part in the line of
plumbing and sanitary devices which, if they do not
exactly heighten the joy of living, at any rate make
the routine of Megalopolitan life a little less formidable.
The total result of these standards and uniformities
is that what was originally a fiction in time becomes a
fact. Whereas the inhabitants of the national utopia
may originally have been as diverse as the trees in a
forest, they tend to become, under the influence of
education and propaganda, as similar as telegraph
poles along a road. It is not a little to the credit of
Megalopolis that the National Utopia has pragmatically
justified itself. It has created the sort of mental
environment on paper which is necessary to a smooth
adjustment of Coketown and the Country House. What
is Megalopolis, in fact, but a paper purgatory which
serves as a medium through which the fallen sons of
Coketown, the producer’s hell, may finally attain the
high bliss of the Country House, the consumer’s
Heaven?
It should be plain that in describing the National
Utopia and Megalopolis I have been trying to outline
what Plato would call the pure form. It is equally
clear, I trust, that the pure form is an idolum to which
any existing national state or metropolis approximates
only so far as the idolum does not conflict too grossly
with the real men and women, the real communities, the
real regions, the real workaday occupations which continue,
despite the reign of these idola, to exist, and to
occupy our main attention. Formal education has not
altogether taken the place of vital education; loyalty
to the state has not altogether succeeded as a substitute
for deeper allegiances and affiliations: occasionally,
here and there, people meet each other face to face,
they eat real food, dig in real earth, smell real flowers
instead of coal tar perfumes that arise from paper
bouquets, and embark quite madly on real love affairs.
It is true that these realities are a disturbing influence:
they are always threatening to undermine the idola
which the politicians and journalists and academic
handymen unite so valiantly to build up; but there they
are—and even the most stubborn idealist cannot help
himself from occasionally confronting the world that
he denies!
If you and I were perfect citizens of Megalopolis,
we should never let anything come between us and our
loyalty to the State: when the State called for our
taxes, we should never think regretfully of the amusements
we must forego in order to pay them; when the
State demanded that we go to war, nothing like the
claims of a family or an occupation or a moral conviction
would ever step between us and our national
duty. By the same token, we should never eat any
other food than that which had been nationally advertized,
and never buy anything direct from the producer
when we might buy it from a third person in Megalopolis;
we should never read any literature that is not
produced in our own country, never desire any other
climate than our own country can boast, and never seek
to find in any other culture, remote in space or time,
the things which we seem to miss in our own environment.
If only this utopia of nationalism could be
realized completely it would be self-sufficient; and there
would be nothing on earth, in heaven, or in the waters
over the earth which did not bear the authentic trademark
of Megalopolis.
The picture of the National Utopia that I have
drawn is perhaps a little too black to stand out clearly;
and I must now add a few high lights for definition.
As in Coketown, there was a point up to which
efficiency in mechanical production was a good thing,
so in the national utopia there is a point up to which
uniformity is a good thing. The National State seems
historically to have arisen in some part through the
relief which the people of the Middle Age experienced
in being able to travel under the protection of the
King’s law along the King’s highway, and their discovery
that common laws and customs, common weights and
measures, were on the whole an advantage over a multitude
of senseless irregularities which continued to exist
in particular neighborhoods. It was a distinct triumph
for the good life when the men of London and the men
of Edinburgh, let us say, realized that they had something
in common as citizens of a single country, and
emphasized the likenesses which bound them as men
rather than the antagonisms that separated them as
cities. If the National State erected barriers of trade
against other countries, it at any rate broke down
barriers that had long existed in even more limited
regions, and that have long continued to exist in certain
cities in Italy and France. So much is to the good.
But uniformity is not a good in itself. It is a good
only in so far as it promotes association and social
intercourse. In breaking down minor barriers, the
State created major ones, and it created national
uniformities in regions where they were meaningless.
Moreover, nationalism is inimical to cultural unity, and
it perpetuates irrelevant conflicts in the Kingdom of
the Spirit where there should be neither slave nor free,
neither white nor black, neither citizen nor outlander.
As a matter of fact, the two great international
cultural vehicles of the Middle Age—the Latin Language
and the Roman Church—were broken down by
the propagation of a National Language, that spoken
at the National Capital, and a National Church, that
which was subservient to the State; and nothing that
nationalism has done since has repaired this loss. On
one hand, the idolum of the National State is too narrow,
because the world of culture is man’s common
inheritance, and not the mere segment of it which is
called “national literature” or “national science.” And
on the other hand, the idolum is too big, for the reason
that there is no bond except a paper one between men
who are as far apart as Bermondsey and Bombay, or
New York and San Francisco. The temporal community,
as Auguste Comte finely pointed out, is local,
restricted, and multiform; this is its essential nature
and limitation. The spiritual community is universal.
It was a great cultural misdemeanor when the National
Utopia, in its extension as imperialism, sought to make
the spiritual community restricted and the temporal
community universal; and it is this heresy to the good
life which makes all the pretensions of the national
utopia so shabby and insincere.
If Coketown and the Country House and the
National Utopia had remained on paper, they would
doubtless be entertaining and edifying contributions to
our literature. Unfortunately, these social myths have
been potent; they have given a pattern to our lives; and
they are the source of a great many evils that threaten,
like stinking weeds, to choke the good life in our communities.
It is not because these myths are utopias
that I have been criticizing them so assiduously; it is
rather because they continue to work such wholesale
damage. Hence it has seemed worth while to point out
that they are on pretty much the same level of reality
as the Republic or Christianopolis. We may perhaps
approach our social institutions a little more courageously
when we realize how completely we ourselves
have created them; and how, without our perpetual
“will to believe” they would vanish like smoke in the
wind.
CHAPTER ELEVEN
How we reckon up accounts with the one-sided utopias
of the partisans.
CHAPTER ELEVEN — 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6
There have been many periods when men did not
think it possible to make life in the community reach
much higher levels than it had attained, without working
a change upon human nature. The working of this
change has been one of the chief preoccupations of
religion; but no one can pretend that it has met, during
the historic period, with any overwhelming success.
In the eighteenth century men became impatient with
the ministrations of institutional religion, and sought
to effect an improvement in the common life by a different
method—by improving the political, economic, and
social mechanisms of society.
Up to this time the only method that had seemed
feasible for improving the technique of social organization
was the mandate of law. Although Aristotle, for
instance, predicted that slavery would come to an end
on the condition that the shuttle should weave by itself
and the lyre play without human hand, no one in the
Greek community of his time saw very much likelihood
of improvement through mechanical inventions or wholesale
innovations in agriculture; and no one, apparently,
concerned himself seriously with the mechanical side of
affairs.
It was the same during the Middle Age. If the men
of that time were not exuberantly happy over their
civilization, they had the dogmatic conviction that
nothing very satisfactory could come of a race that
had inherited the curse of Adam—a race whose only
salvation could come when its individuals were purged
one by one of sin, and delivered, by the intercession of
the saints and the grace of God, into a more benignly
constituted afterworld. One might relieve the pressure
a little if the shoe pinched, perhaps, but scarcely anyone
dreamed of travelling in seven-league boots, or of
establishing an Arcadia in which boots could be dispensed
with. It was foolish to look for a more perfect
society in a world that was rife with imperfect men.
The Renascence, as we have seen, changed all this.
Presently a school of philosophers followed on the heels
of the utopians who devoted themselves to preparing
fairly minute plans and specifications for the social
order. In the beginning, these plans were devoted to
politics and criminal reform, like those of Rousseau,
Beccaria, Bentham, Jefferson, Godwin, and the eighteenth
century reformers generally; in the nineteenth
century the main accent was economic, and a number of
movements arose which could be traced back to the
semi-scientific investigations of Adam Smith, Ricardo,
Proudhon, Malthus, Marx, and perhaps half a dozen
other thinkers of outstanding importance, among whom
we should perhaps include such latter day figures as
Mill, Spencer, and Henry George.
All of these thinkers have in one way or another
influenced our thoughts and deflected our actions; and
if one adds to this galaxy the reforming elements which
remained in the churches and the missionary brotherhoods
and the philanthropic organizations, we can
observe, growing up in the nineteenth century, a multitude
of partisan organizations and movements, each of
which is strenuously bent on realizing its private and
partisan utopia. It is these private and partisan
utopias that I purpose to make a slight reckoning with
in the present chapter; but the field is such a huge and
formidable one that I shall limit my criticism in the
main to those that attempted to effect a change in the
economic order.
For all the activities that men engage in we have
separate words. This is a great misfortune; for in
using these words we tend to believe that each action
takes place in a separate compartment. Instead of
beginning with a whole man interacting in a whole community,
we are likely to consider only a partial man in
a partial community, and by a mental sleight of hand,
before we know it, we have let the part stand for the
whole. It is this sort of abstraction, I believe, that has
been responsible for a good deal of fallacious thinking
with regard to the place of industry in the community.
The economists seem to have made the error first by
talking of a creature whom they called the Economic
Man, a creature who had no instincts but those of
construction and acquisition, no habits but of working
and saving, and no other ultimate purpose than to
become such a captain of industry as would make him
a candidate for the biographic sketches of Mr. Samuel
Smiles, and his present successors in the newspapers and
popular magazines.
Now this Economic Man was the embodiment of
honest labor and rapacious greed. Out of the better
quality, Karl Marx painted the picture of the faithful
laborer in Coketown whose masters swindled him out of
the “surplus value” he produced; out of the worse
quality classical economists like Ricardo painted an
equally entrancing picture of the beneficent capitalist,
through whose foresight, organizing ability, and boldness
business could be conducted on a scale a simpler
age had scarcely dreamed of. It was out of these conceptions,
as they were elaborated and rationalized in
books like Porter’s Progress of the Nineteenth Century
and Marx’s Capital, that there grew up the
notion that the only fundamental problem in the modern
world was the labor problem—the problem as to who
should control industry, who should profit by its advances,
and who should own the complicated instruments
by which it was conducted.
Our business here is not to examine the various
programs that were offered during the last century in
answer to these problems; merely to catalog them with
the barest explanation of their purpose would be an
imposing task, were it not for the fact that it has been
neatly done for us by Mr. Savel Zimand. It is enough
to see here the common element in capitalism, copartnery,
State Socialism, Guild Socialism, Co-operation,
Communism, Syndicalism, the One Big Union, Trades
Unionism, and the like; whether these movements represent
actual facts, like capitalism, copartnery, or trades
unionism, or whether they are simply projections, like
Syndicalism and the One Big Union.
If our excursion through the classic utopias has been
of any use, it must have shown us how pathetic is this
notion that the key to a good society rests simply on
the ownership and control of the industrial plant of the
community. Is it any less absurd when we confess that
most of the movements which were founded upon this
assumption were actuated by generous and humane
motives, and that Francis Place, the tailor of Charing
Cross, who believed in a radical application of laissez
faire principles, was just as sincere a believer in the
common weal as Karl Marx, who predicted a dictatorship
of the proletariat? If a great many of these programs
have had the notion that industrial machinery,
under socialism or guildism or co-operation was to be
used for the common benefit, what was lacking was any
common notion as to what the common benefit was.
All that was common to these partisan utopias was
a desire to get rid of positive evils such as overwork or
starvation or irregularity of employment. In their
rejection of the existing order of Coketown, with its
rubbish heaps for the disposal of material waste, and
its jails, hospitals, sanatoria, doss houses, Salvation
Army Headquarters, and charitable organizations for
the disposal of the human excrement of industrialism—in
turning their backs upon these things and asserting
the simple elements of human dignity, all our radical
programs were right and inevitable. To reject what
industrial society had to offer its members in the filthy
factory districts and wretched slums of Coketown was
obviously to reject barbarism and degradation of the
worst sort: the incredible thing about the industrial
revolution, indeed, is not that there were a few riots
here and there against the use of machinery, but that
the industrial population has not been in a state of
continual insurrection, and that the industrial towns
have not been looted and razed again and again. It is
nothing less than a tribute to the fundamental good
nature and sweetness of human beings that the strikes
by which the workers have expressed their sense of
grievance have not demolished the material hovels that
today stand upright in the valleys of York-Riding, in
the valleys of the Ohio and its tributaries, or in that
terrible slum which stretches in back of the Jersey
meadows from Elizabeth into Patterson. There are
many districts in these areas which are scarcely worth
the respect of orderly demolition. To give a grim
rejection to the society that produced them only mildly
meets the situation. They should be destroyed by
trumpets and God’s wrath—like Jericho!
So much for what is sound and valid in the various
one-sided programs for reform. But if their attitude
towards the past performances of industrialism was
sound, their gesture towards the future, and their
attitude towards the whole milieu, was little less than
indifferent. There were to be certain gains in money
wages, in political control, in the distribution of products,
and so forth; but the realization of these gains
was never projected in any very vivid way—a vague
fellowship in peace and plenty under gay red banners
was all that was left over when the current efforts to
“educate the masses,” “revise the constitution,” or
“organize the revolution” were taken for granted.
In his Socialism: Utopian and Scientific, Friedrich
Engels made a plea for a realistic method of thought,
which limited itself to a here and now, as against what
he derided as the utopian method, the attempt on the
part of a single thinker to give a detailed picture of
the society of the future. Yet at the present time it is
easy to see that if the utopian socialism of Owen has
been ineffective, the realistic socialism of Marx has been
equally ineffective; for while Owen’s kind of socialism
has been partly fulfilled in the co-operative movement,
the dictatorship of the proletariat rests upon very
shaky foundations, and such success as it has had is
due perhaps as much to Marx’s literary picture of
what it would be like as to anything else. I do not
doubt that the partisan movements have achieved many
specific gains; consumer’s co-operation alone has in
England measurably lightened the physical burden of
existence for a great many people. Their weakness
consists in the fact that they have not altered the contents
of the modern social order, even when they have
altered the method of distribution; and in addition, a
good many of these partisan utopias, for lack of any
definite and coherent scheme of values, crumble away as
soon as they meet the opposition of such powerful collective
utopias as Coketown or the Country House. In
America, particularly, the labor movement is paralyzed
by this perpetual movement into the bourgeoisie—concretely
speaking, into Suburbia and the Country House—and
in Great Britain much the same sort of dereliction
can be observed within the narrower group from
which the leaders of the trades unions and the Labor
Party are drawn.
Hence also the less interesting problem of the Tired
Radical, which Mr. Walter Weyl suggestively outlined.
There is indeed a pertinent criticism of the paper environment
of Megalopolis, in the tenacious way in which
people continue to cling to abstract programs and to
movements which never approach perceptibly nearer
their fulfillment. The marvel is that the concrete
utopia of the Country House has not exercised a more
potent influence than it actually does. When one compares
the vast amount of agitation during the last
century—the Chartist Movement, the Socialist Movement,
the International Peace Movement—with the
actual results in the reconstruction of work, place, and
people, or with the actual effects any reconstruction
has had upon our polity, our culture, our art—it is
surprising that these movements have had any effective
claim upon our allegiance. Men will indeed work for
an idea—the notion that they will not is a superstition—but
sooner or later the spirit must be made
manifest in the flesh, and if it never comes to birth, or
at best is an abortion, the idea is bound to wither
away.
How long would the parliamentary clatter of socialism
have mechanically kept on—had it not been for
the dislocation of war? How long could its abstract
programs have remained in the air, before coming down
to specifications? I obviously cannot answer these
questions; but it seems plain enough that our radical
programs have had simply a sentimental interest: they
moved people without giving them a specific task, they
stirred them emotionally without giving them an outlet,
and so, at best, they are but partial utopias of
escape, using the powers of organization, collective
meetings, and pronunciamentos to take the place of
the emotional stimuli which the avowed utopia of escape,
like News from Nowhere, supplies by introducing a
beautiful girl. In this aspect, the Socialist Party,
with its revolutionary demands, did not differ in its
psychological performance from the Republican Party,
which specialized in the rhetorical device of the full
dinner pail; nor did it differ in any fundamental way
from the defunct Progressive Party, which for a time
believed in a new heaven and earth to follow the initiative,
referendum, and recall with an intensity of moral
conviction beside which the social revolutionist was
positively tame.
Who doubts the honesty and sincerity of most of the
members of these parties? Who doubts their devotion
to revolution or “uplift”? It is all beside the point.
A machine which doesn’t work because it is badly constructed
is just as useless as one that doesn’t work
because its maker is a deliberate fraud; and all the
sincerity and good will and honesty doesn’t make any
one a smile the happier. It is about time that we
faced the facts and realized that in all our sundry
mechanisms of reform “there is a screw loose somewhere.”
This pregnant metaphor of the industrial
age is usually applied to neurotic disorder; and I am
using it in the present context with fell intentions.
I mean that the utopia of the partisan is, psychologically
speaking, a fetish; that is to say, it is an attempt
to substitute the part for the whole, and to pour into
the part all the emotional content that belongs to the
whole. When a man gets hold of a lady’s handkerchief
or garter, and behaves towards that object with as
much intensity and interest as he would towards its
flesh and blood owner, the handkerchief or garter is
said to be a fetish. I hazard the judgment that Socialism,
Prohibition, Proportional Representation, and
the various other abstract “isms” are the fetishes of
the partisan: they are attempts to make some particular
instrument or function of the community stand for
the whole. It is doubtless much easier to filch a handkerchief
than to win a girl. By the same token, it is
easier to concentrate on the use of liquor or the ownership
of machinery and land than upon the totality of
a community’s activities. It is easier indeed; but it
is fatal; for the result of this fetishism is perhaps that
the girl remains unmated, and the society fails to undergo
any fundamental change. Moreover, the reforming
elements in society become incapacitated by their
practice of fetishism to take a normal part in the community’s
activities; and remain so much waste material—at
best, they wander between two worlds, “one
dead, the other powerless to be born.”
We know these disoriented reformers, these disillusioned
revolutionaries, these tired radicals; we could
mention names if it were not so needless and so cruel.
Apart from anything else, their original mistake was
to keep their problem within the compartment of politics
and economics, instead of venting it to the wide
world. They forgot that the adjustment of some single
activity or institution, without respect to the rest,
begged the very difficulty they were trying to overcome.
If they were anti-militarists, they saw the world
simply as an armed camp; if they were socialists, they
saw it as a gigantic mechanism of exploitation; and
alas! they saw only so much of the world as would conveniently
fit within these diagrams. The world is perhaps
an armed camp and a mechanism of exploitation;
it is all that and much more; but any attempt to deal
with it on a wholesale plan by eliminating all the qualifying
elements in the problem is bound to encounter
the brute nature of things; and if the nature of things
is essentially antagonistic, the reform itself will fail.
To say all this is to emphasize the obvious. If any
further emphasis were needed it would be necessary only
to compare the doctrines of Marx, as expounded by
Lenin at the beginning of the Russian Revolution, and
the doctrines of Lenin, as tempered by experience and
circumstance a few years later.
There was still another weakness that characterized
all the partisan utopias of the nineteenth century. That
weakness was their externalism.
If the mediæval thinkers were convinced that, on the
whole, nothing could be done to rectify men’s institutions,
while men themselves were so easily bitten by
corruption, their successors in the nineteenth century
committed the opposite kind of error and absurdity:
they believed that human nature was unsocial and
obstreperous only because the church, the state, or the
institution of property perverted every human impulse.
Men like Rousseau, Bentham, Godwin, Fourier, and
Owen might be miles apart from one another in their
criticism of society, but there was an underlying consensus
in their belief in human nature. They looked
upon human institutions as altogether external to men;
these were so many straitjackets that cunning rulers
had thrown over the community to make sane and kindly
people behave like madmen; and they could conceive of
changing the institutions without changing the habits
and redirecting the impulses of the people by whom
and for whom they had been created. If one devised
neat political constitutions, with plenty of checks and
balances, or laid out pauper colonies and invited the
countryside to make use of them—well, all would be to
the good.
There was, it is true, one great exception to this
notion that institutions might be reformed without, in
that process, making over men. I refer to the belief
in education which accompanied these classic criticisms
of human institutions; for this seems to point to a perception
that men needed a special training and discipline
before they could enter freely into the life of a
reconstituted community. But upon examination, this
exception melts away. The emphasis in the new programs
of education was upon the formal, institutional
acquirement of the apparatus of knowledge; and they,
too, began with the clean slate of a new generation,
whereas the critical difficulty was that of getting the
adult community sufficiently educated, in a realistic
sense, to be able to make over its educational institutions;
and in this respect the reformers were just as
much in Cuckooland as—well, Campanella. So it follows
that the Country House and Coketown shared
honors in building up the new educational organizations;
and the outcome of the sort of education that
the public school and college provided was to make
these redoubtable utopias practically unassailable.
Besides, there were the adults: consider Robert
Owen!
Robert Owen, one of the most sanguine advocates of
popular education, was himself a living example of the
need for a different kind of discipline than his narrow
and homiletic mind, with its childish interpretation of
religious belief and its equally childish rationalism, was
capable of framing. No one ever frustrated so many
good ideas, from the plan of garden cities down to the
project for co-operative production than this same
Owen, whose bumptiousness, arrogance, and conceit
were bound to provoke reactions in other people which
would have defeated the plans of Omnipotence itself.
The capital difficulty was to get any sort of social improvement
in a world that was full of refractory Owens.
A locomotive may, in a sense, be a more perfect thing
than the man who made it; but no social order can be
better than the human beings who take part in it; for
whereas the locomotive can stand apart from its operatives
and perform all its functions effectively even if
the workers themselves are deficient in every other respect
than mechanics, with a social order the product
and the producer continue to be one.
Not merely does a community need a Buddha, let us
say, before it can produce Buddhism; it needs a whole
succession of Buddhas if the religion itself is not to
fritter away into the hideous ecclesiastical grind it became
in Thibet. This principle has a general application.
The social critics of the last century confused
the mechanical problem of transforming an institution
or of creating a new organization with the personal and
social problem of spurring people to effect the transformation
and see it through. Their tactics were
those of a general who would go into battle without
training his army; their strategy was that of the
demagogue who talks of a million armed men springing
up overnight. The personal problem, the problem of
education, was as easy as that!
If we are to account for the poverty of our achievements
in renovating the community, in contrast with
the enormous amount of quite justifiable economic and
political agitation, research, and criticism, it is perhaps
not altogether fair to put the entire burden of failure
upon the partisan’s lop-sided utopia. The plans of
our reformers have indeed been weak and jerrybuilt in
themselves; but that is not all. What has perhaps
been even more conspicuously lacking has been people
who are accessible to the existing knowledge, people
whose minds have been trained to play freely with the
facts, people who have learned the fine and exacting
art of co-operating with their fellows; people who are
as critical of their own mental processes and habits of
behavior as they are of the institutions they wish to
alter. As Viola Paget says: “The bulk of thinking
and feeling intended to help on human improvement
has not really been good enough for the purpose. Not
good enough in the sense of not sufficiently impersonal
and disciplined.”
Between our programs, our utopias, and their fulfillment
there has usually dropt a thick veil of personalities;
and were the plan itself the collaborate product
of the best minds of the race; as Mr. H. G. Wells
satirically pictured in Boon, it would still have to take
its chances with the wild asses of the devil that human
weakness, apathy, greed, lust for power, might release.
Walt Whitman said of Carlyle that behind the tally of
his work and genius stood the stomach, and gave a sort
of casting vote. So one may say of every social movement,
that behind the tally of its theoretic background
and its concrete programs stand human beings—hale
and sick, neurotic and stable, well-intentioned and
malicious—and give the casting vote.
Anyone who has read an important book, and then
met the author, who has respected an apparently significant
social movement, and then met the leaders behind
the scenes, will realize how frequent is the difficulty
of reconciling theoretic agreement with the inaccessibilities
and prejudices and repugnances of particular
personalities. No one can join the work of even the
most trivial sort of committee—be it a delegation to
shake hands with the Congressman or a body designated
to revise the rules of a tennis club—without discovering
how the work in hand is perpetually being balked and
diverted by the play of personalities.
It is not a little significant that popular speech gives
the word “personalities” a derogatory meaning. Again
and again the success or failure in large collaborations
hinges upon human factors that have no bearing on the
question at issue. Pope’s satiric words about wretches
hanging that jurymen may dine touches the point
neatly. Our programs for reconstruction that have not
reckoned with the perpetual cussedness of human nature
and have no method for exorcising it are as shallow as
those older theologies which sought to make men live
in grace without altering the social order in which
they functioned. Perhaps they could learn something
from the story of that ancient agitator who cured
the blind, the maimed, the sick, and the halt before he
bade them enter into the Kingdom of Heaven. Emerson
well said in his essay on Man the Reformer that it was
stupid to expect any real or permanent change from
any social program which was unable to regenerate or
convert—these are religious phases for a common
psychological phenomenon—the people who are to engineer
it and carry it through.
It would be so easy, this business of making over the
world, if it were only a matter of creating machinery.
There has probably never been lacking the sort of
energy and talent that is needed for this sort of work;
and at any rate, during the last three centuries, with
the growth of technology, the mechanical services at
the command of our engineers and organizers are huge
and adequate. Unfortunately, we are still in the same
ditch that Carlyle mordantly pointed out in his essay
on Characteristics: Given a world of knaves, we are
trying by various cunning devices to produce an honesty
from their united action. I do not share Carlyle’s
contempt for human nature in the raw, but he is quite
right, I believe, in making fun of the superficiality of
our partisan utopias. These utopias were so concerned
to alter the shell of the community’s institutions that
they neglected to pay attention to the habits of the
creature itself—or its habitat. That is why mechanical
devices play such an important part, perhaps, in all
these utopias, from Jeremy Bentham, with his Panopticon
method of reforming criminals, down to the hideous
cog-and-wheel utopia of Edward Bellamy.
The conceptions of human life that our reforming
groups have had have been pretty thin and unsatisfying.
Any adequate conception of a new social order would,
it seems to me, include the scenery, the actors, and the
play. It is a mark of our immaturity that we never
seem able to get beyond the scene shifting. Our social
theorists, in so far as they consider the actors at all,
are inclined to treat them as mechanical puppets. As
for the play itself—the universal drama of courtship
and trial and adventure and contest and achievement,
in which every human being is potentially the hero or
heroine—the play itself has hardly entered into their
consciousness. Their values have not been human
values: they have been such values as have been authenticated
by commerce and industry, values such as efficiency,
fair wages, and what not. These, at any rate,
have been the immediate objects of effort, and if human
values hung vaguely in the background, they were to
be realized in a distant and unascertainable future. So
one often feels that no matter how base and deteriorated
the modern community is, it nevertheless retains
in its totality a greater measure of human values than
many of the groups that have attacked its inadequacy
have to offer.
All this comes out pretty plainly in the attitude of
the labor groups towards the current situation.
Whether they are organized for political action or for
industrial warfare, their aims are curiously similar.
In the very act of contending against the present order,
they have accepted the ends for which that order stands
and have been content to demand simply that they be
universalized. This perhaps accounts for the essential
uncreativeness of the labor movement. By a revolution
they do not mean a transvaluation of values: they mean
a dilution and spreading out of established practices
and institutions. There may indeed be plenty of excuse
for this attitude in any particular situation—a
group of unorganized and semi-destitute workers such
as those in many American steel plants—but the worst
of it is that this attitude characterizes the more advanced
and economically secure groups, and creeps into
such ultimate programs as one can deduce from attempts
to create workers’ educational institutions—as
if a change in ownership or the balance of power
would alter the face of Coketown so that its fires would
no longer burn and its cinders no longer smut.
I have emphasized what is the weakness, as it seems
to me, of the labor movement; not because I am necessarily
out of sympathy with any particular measure
that might be proposed, but because it illustrates upon
an enormous scale the point which I desire to make.
The prohibition movement, or the charity organization
movement—towards both of which I feel, on the
contrary, a cordial antipathy—would serve just as
well for illustration; for they all have this common
distinction: they lack any explicit, consciously projected
humane ends which would make any particular
measure that they might offer justified.
Let me now anticipate the answer which this criticism
will probably meet. To some people it will seem that
the current movements for reform are inevitably
secular; that they have no business to concern themselves
with the ultimate faith of men; that they inevitably
deal with a limited here and now, a dollar more of
wages, a drop less of liquor, a touch more of uniformity,
and so forth. In short, our partial utopias need not
concern themselves with any of the questions that have
to do with the life of the spirit.
The simple answer to this crude philosophy is—so
much the worse for them. The breach between the institutions
that deal with the material life and those
that deal with the ideal life results either in a complete
dissociation, by which each set of institutions becomes
paralytic and imbecile; or, as so often happens, in a
capitulation of the spiritual power to the temporal,
and its complete engrossment in temporal ends. I am
aware that these phrases, “spiritual” and “temporal,”
have a certain old-fashioned smell; but they precisely
express my meaning: it is plain that every community
contains the corresponding institutions—one group
being devoted to values and the other to means. When
our reforms are not touched by a sense of values, the
result is that purely temporal ends are taken as ultimate,
and we have such notions as efficiency or organization
regarded as the very touchstone of social improvement.
This is scarcely an improvement over the
old order of things, with which we are now so dismally
familiar—the state in which our values were not fertilized
by any intercourse with the concrete and actual
world about us, and so remained remote and sterile. In
short, unless our reformers concern themselves with
the ultimate values of men, with what constitutes a
good life, they are bound to pander to such immediate
faiths and superstitions as the National State, Efficiency,
or the White Man’s Burden.
There is a final criticism of the partial utopias: our
one-sided reforms have had this fatal defect—they are
one-sided. This partisanship was expressed by their
relation to the facts upon which their programs were
based, and in their attitude towards the people who
were to be affected by them.
The mood of partisanship has been that of a lawyer
who is getting up an argument and is looking for such
facts as will bolster up his case. That mood is inimical
to free and intelligent thought: its object is rhetorical
triumph. Now it happens that in all the matters which
intimately concern a community, a person’s attitude
towards the facts not merely seems more important than
the facts themselves, but seems so deucedly important
that the facts are ignored. The attitude of a group
of Southern whites who will lynch a negro on the report
that he has raped a white woman before they investigate
the truth of the assertion is a bestial exaggeration of a
very natural human tendency. Men are built for action
rather than thought; or rather, since thought, on the
psychologist’s interpretation, is inhibited action, the
business of inhibition naturally comes a little hard to
us; and when we are in a place where we have the rough
choice of pushing through the obstacle, under a strong
impulse of resentment (instinct of pugnacity) or may
quietly withdraw from the obstacle, survey it, and frame
a plan of action to circumvent it, our fundamental
impulse is to follow the first mode.
It is easy to see, for example, how the hideous human
suffering which accompanied the growth of the capitalist
organization—and still exists!—caused the socialists
to concentrate attention upon the subjects of ownership
and profits, and long blinded them to the specific
problems of organization, distribution, and control
within the industries that might be affected by the
program of socialization. This concentration upon the
particular aspect of a problem, like the concentration
upon a particular aspect of the solution, has the weakness
of ignoring the total situation, and it too crudely
simplifies the difficulties. In their haste to arrive at
solutions and remedies—for the life of man is short and
the needs of the moment are pressing—the partisans
neglect to make a complete tally of the facts; and they
are too ready to let “common knowledge” take the place
of a thorough investigation of the data.
This weakness arises out of an almost instinctive
tendency towards partisanship; and it is one of the
reasons that partisanship continues. If nothing else
prevents groups from getting together, their failure
to agree about the facts, and their lack of a method for
getting at the facts and focussing them, is responsible.
If an examination of the facts did nothing else, it might
show at least the impossibility of drawing any conclusion
from them, and it might warn the partisan to step
warily. Thus the testimony that was offered for and
against Prohibition came from fairly high authorities
on both sides; and if there had been anything like right
reason in the strategically stronger camp, it would
have convinced those who were interested in the welfare
of the community that nothing could be wisely
done while the very basis for judgment—scientific
knowledge as to the place of alcoholic stimuli in the life
of the human organism—had not been established.
It is of course conceivable that men will quarrel and
split when they are fully apprised of the facts: we may
well remember the story of the British ambassador who
confessed to his French colleague that the reason he
did not get on very well with the Americans was that
both countries unfortunately spoke the same language;
but it is inconceivable that they should ever reach an
intelligent agreement before they are in common possession
of the facts. By ignoring the necessity for substantiating
his claims and assertions the partisan frequently
not merely fails to see his whole problem in all
its implications, but also prevents any one else from
seeing it. Even when the partisan is not intentionally
blind, he lacks the discipline which is essential to an
open-eyed judgment of the case. What that discipline
may be I shall attempt to discuss in the next chapter.
The second weakness of partisanship is that it breaks
the community into vertical divisions, and promotes
fictitious antagonisms and kinships which run against
the horizontal affiliations and loyalties of a man’s life.
This tendency was nicely illustrated in a play by Mr.
St. John Ervine, called Mixed Marriage, which dealt
with the love affair of a young girl and a young man
who were separated by the religions that had been
handed down by their parents. In Mr. Ervine’s
wretched little Ulster community, these religions served
as an excuse to keep people from being friendly and
decent to their neighbors. Now it is obvious that
mating, and making friends with those who have common
interests and sentiments, and mixing freely within
the whole community, are highly important horizontal
interests; they tend to unite people in a common bond
which is fundamental for the reason that these interests
and activities are essentially human. The antagonism
between two Christian sects, on the other hand, undermines
the good life as a whole, because it insists that
there is no other good than a religious good—a good
embodied in a pope, or in the practice of scoffing at a
pope—while it is obvious to anyone who has possession
of his senses that kissing a pretty girl is good, and
having a friendly pipe with one’s neighbor is good, and
that institutions which prevent one from doing these
things at appropriate times are perverted and antisocial.
It is true that people who emphasize religious
interests take “high ground,” as the saying is, and
that those who value the friendly pipe seem by implication
to take low ground: but what the partisans fail
to see is that there is a good human case for low ground,
and that, for the great majority of people it may prove
to be not merely the only practicable ground, but in
its own right a good and sufficient one.
Now for Catholic and Protestant in Mr. St. John
Ervine’s play one may substitute Democrat and Republican,
White Guard and Red Guard, Socialist and
Financier, Prohibitionist and anti-Prohibitionist and
the results will be just as deplorably the same. There
are any number of interests in a well-wrought life which
lie altogether beyond these categories, and it is the
chief misdemeanor of partisanism, as opposed to
utopianism, that it tends to slight these general interests,
and either bring them into the service of the “ism”
or urge that they be neglected in devotion to the
“cause.” The first method has been used by the apostles
of nationalism. The National State, recognizing that
art and culture and science could not be altogether engrossed
in the strategy of political warfare, promptly
put these goods in the pigeon hole labelled national
resources. The partisans of the State talked about
American science as opposed to German science, of
Italian art as opposed to French art; and thus emphasized
the things which men in America had with
other Americans in order to mark off more clearly the
things they had apart from men of similar interests in
other countries. The same thing happened in the Russian
communist state, with its attempt to set aside the
common cultural heritage of mankind at large and define
a purely proletarian culture. The results in every
case are, I believe, incurably mischievous; and those
who would promote the good life must cease this infantile
practice of asserting vainly that “my father
knows more than your father,” “my mother is more
beautiful than your mother”—and so on.
For the most part the second method has been indefatigably
used. In the political state the partisans
make a great show of the gulf which separates the
political party in power from that which is outside, and
every other interest in life is supposed to be secondary
to this abysmal cleavage. In relatively crude communities,
like the United States and Ireland, these differences
seem to be taken by the great mass of people at
their face value; whereas in England, which at least
has the virtues of disillusion, it is the great tradition of
Parliament that all the animosities of the floor are
ignored in the bar of the House of Commons, while all
the congenialities and convivialities that bind men together
are emphasized. Lest I be accused of prejudice
where none exists, let me add that in the most substantial
reconstruction movement that Ireland possesses—I
refer to agricultural co-operation as promoted by Sir
Horace Plunkett and A. E.—the horizontal interests
which bind men together as farmers and members of a
local community are successfully emphasized to the
exclusion of irrelevant vertical differences, at least in
matters touching the organization and conduct of the
Irish Agricultural Organization Society; and that, as
far as I can see, this single organization has done more
to promote the good life in Ireland than any other
institution, with the possible exception of the equally
non-partisan literary association which grew up in
Dublin under the leadership of A. E., William Butler
Yeats, Lady Gregory, and the rest of that fine and
glorious crew.
Obviously, it is not altogether for nothing that men
have joined together in vertical organizations which
are as broad as a continent, let us say, or the European
world. There is a sense in which the Christians of
Jerusalem have more in common with the Christians
of Rome than they have with the Jews and Mohammedans
of their local region. In the same way, I find
myself more deeply drawn to certain friends of mine
in Bombay and London than I am towards my next
door neighbor, with whom the only recognizable bond
is our common animus against a rapacious landlord.
So long as the vertical affiliation with people of the
same views in politics or religion or philosophy is a
spiritual affiliation a great deal of good may come out
of it. When, however, the things that draw people together
as members of a vertical group are used as a
means of inflicting similar opinions or practices upon
the local community, without respect to its regional
qualities, the results are little less than disastrous.
The rain falls on the just and the unjust; more than
that, the food that we grow, the houses that we build,
the roads that we lay down, the thoughts that we think,
belong to us as members of the human species who have
inherited the earth and the fullness thereof; and it is
absurd to let differences in our idola prevent us from
participating equally in this common heritage.
At long last, the things that unite human beings as
human beings, the social inheritance that enables them
to realize their stature as human beings, are more important
than any particular element that the partisan
may lay hold of. Whether our partisanism consists in
being first and foremost an American or first and foremost
a Theosophist, it tends to limit the world with
which we may have commerce and so impoverishes the
personality. The person who insists upon being a
hundred per cent. American has by that very emphasis
become something less than half a man. By fastening
attention upon a segment of the world, the partisan
creates a segment of a personality. It is these segments
or sects that any movement which aims at a
general good in the community must contend against.
So long as work for the common welfare meets with
irrelevant partisanisms, so long will we lack the means
of creating whole men and women; and so long will the
main concerns of civilization be side-tracked.
What a vision these partisan utopias present! They
are like the scattered bones that the prophet saw in the
terrible valley, and one doubts whether even the breath
of the Lord could knit them together again into real
bodies....
One of these partisan utopias issues from a bundle
of red-tape; everything is filed and ticketed and labelled
there; and anything in life that cannot be treated in
this fashion does not exist. Another is a mechanical
contraption; somehow it seems to litter little mechanical
contraptions; and its aim is, it would seem, to do away
with vegetation and reproduction, so that everything
under the sun might be performed with the sterile accuracy
of the machine. A third utopia of the partisan
calls human beings, with all their color and thickness,
“individuals,” and makes the good life a matter of legal
relationships without any regard to their necessities in
time and space; such a utopia could almost be carried
in one’s pocket, so much is it a matter of verbal statement.
We need not go down the line. Singly, it is
plain that not one of these utopias would create a happy
community; while if all of these partisanisms could be
realized the result could scarcely be anything else than
discord—such a discord as now exists and every day
becomes more raucous.
It would seem that we are at an impasse. Even if I
have absurdly exaggerated the futility of the reformers
and revolutionaries, their lack of any fundamental program
and their inability to conceive an essential reorientation
in modern society, come out pretty plainly. If
our analysis did not prove this, the atmosphere of disillusion
which we breathe today, and which permeates
every branch of literature, would tell as much. In so far
as we have accepted the modern social order we are
in ruin; and the next war that now threatens will, if
it actually comes to pass, only carry the ruin a little
further. In so far as we have pinned our hopes to
current movements for reconstruction or revolution,
our plans are sickly and debilitated. In fact, the only
genuine signs of life seem to be in regions like Ireland,
Denmark, India, and China, which have stood
outside the movement of industrial civilization and have
retained the values of an order which elsewhere has
been undermined and almost destroyed. It is not a
pretty situation to face; and small wonder that we
are so slow and so reluctant to face it. Whichever
way we look, bankruptcy seems to threaten us.
It is time we endeavored to cash in the paper roubles
of the partisan. If our civilization is to hold together
we must place its intellectual currency on a new basis;
we must exchange our abstract idealisms, our abstract
programs, our paperized pursuit of happiness for some
of the golden coinage of life, even though we cannot
have our gold without mixing it with baser metals.
CHAPTER TWELVE
How the half-worlds go, and how eutopia may come;
and what we need before we can build Jerusalem in
any green and pleasant land.
The sort of thinking that has created our utopias
has placed desire above reality; and so their chief fulfillment
has been in the realm of fantasy. This is true
of the classic utopias that we have surveyed, and it is
true—though not perhaps quite so apparent—of the
partial utopias that were formulated by the various
reconstruction movements during the last century.
While the classic utopias have so far been nearer to
reality that they have projected a whole community,
living and working and mating and spanning the gamut
of man’s activity, their projections have nevertheless
been literally up in the air, since they did not usually
arise out of any real environment or attempt to meet the
conditions that this environment presented. This defect
has been suggested by the very name of Utopia,
for as Professor Patrick Geddes points out, Sir Thomas
More was an inveterate punster, and Utopia is a mock-name
for either Outopia, which means no-place, or
Eutopia—the good place.
It is time to bring our utopian idola and our everyday
world into contact; indeed, it is high time, for the
idola that have so far served us are now disintegrating
so rapidly that our mental world will soon be as empty
of useful furniture as a deserted house, while wholesale
dilapidation and ruin threaten the institutions that
once seemed permanent. Unless we can weave a new
pattern for our lives the outlook for our civilization is
almost as dismal as Herr Spengler finds it in Der
Untergang des Abendlandes. Our choice is not between
eutopia and the world as it is, but between eutopia
and nothing—or rather, nothingness. Other civilizations
have proved inimical to the good life and have
failed and past away; and there is nothing but our own
will-to-eutopia to prevent us from following them.
If this dissipation of Western Civilization is to cease,
the first step in reconstruction is to make over our inner
world, and to give our knowledge and our projections
a new foundation. The problem of realizing the
potential powers of the community—which is the fundamental
problem of eutopian reconstruction—is not
simply a matter of economics or eugenics or ethics as
the various specialist thinkers and their political followers
have emphasized. Max Beer, in his History of
British Socialism, points out that Bacon looked for
the happiness of mankind chiefly in the application of
science and industry. But by now it is plain that if
this alone were sufficient, we could all live in heaven
tomorrow. Beer points out that More, on the other
hand, looked to social reform and religious ethics to
transform society; and it is equally plain that if the
souls of men could be transformed without altering
their material and institutional activities, Christianity,
Mohammedanism, and Buddhism might have created an
earthly paradise almost any time this last two thousand
years. The truth is, as Beer sees, that these two conceptions
are still at war with each other: idealism and
science continue to function in separate compartments;
and yet “the happiness of man on earth” depends upon
their combination.
If we are to build up genuine eutopias, instead of
permitting ourselves to pattern our behavior in terms
of fake utopias like Coketown, the Country House, the
National State, and all the other partial and inadequate
myths to which we have given allegiance, we must
examine anew the idola which will assist us in reconstituting
our environment. So we are forced to consider
the place of science and art in our social life,
and to discuss what must be done in order to make
them bear more concretely upon “the improvement of
man’s estate.”
There was a time when the world of knowledge and
the world of dreams were not separated; when the artist
and the scientist, for all practical purposes, saw the
“outside world” through the same kind of spectacles.
What we call “science” today was in its primitive
state part and parcel of that common stock of knowledge
and belief which makes up a community’s literature,
or, as Dr. Beattie Crozier would have said, its
“Bible.” The departure of science from this main body
of literature begins for the Western World, probably,
with the death of Plato and the institution of Aristotle’s
collections in natural history; and from that point onwards
the separate sciences, increasingly isolate themselves
from the general body of knowledge, and utilize
methods which had been unknown to the earlier philosophers
and sages; so that by the time the twentieth
century dawns the process of differentiation has been
completed, and philosophy, once the compendium of
the sciences, has disappeared except as a sort of impalpable,
viscous residue.
When Aristotle divided his writing into the exoteric
and esoteric groups, into the popular and the scientific,
he definitely recognized the existence of two separate
branches of literature, two different ways of taking
account of the world, two disparate methods of approaching
its problems. The first branch was that of
the philosophers, the prophets, the poets, and the plain
people. Its background was the generality of human
experience: its methods were those of discussion and
conference: its criteria were those of formal dialectics:
its interests were specifically those of the community,
and nothing human was foreign to it. With the petrification
of Greek thought that followed the collapse
of the Alexandrian school, the second branch was slow
in coming into its own. As late as the eighteenth century
its adherents were called natural philosophers, to
distinguish them from the more humane variety; and
it is only with the nineteenth century that the subject
became universally known as science and its practitioners
as scientists.
In the Phædrus Socrates had expressed the humanist
outlook of literature by saying: “Trees and fields, you
know, cannot teach me anything, but men in the city
can.” The shortest way of describing the attitude of
science is to say that it resolutely turned its back on
men in the city and devoted itself to the trees and fields
and stars and the rest of brute nature. If it paid attention
to men at all it saw them—if we may abuse an
old quotation—as trees walking. Socrates had said:
Know thyself. The scientist said: Know the world that
lies outside man’s dominion. As science progressed
these attitudes became more rigid, unfortunately, and a
conflict grew up between literature and science, between
the humanities and natural philosophy, which has given
both art and science the peculiar twist we shall presently
examine.
Now the developments in modern science go back,
through the Arabic thinkers, to ancient Greece; but
the great advances that have been made date back
scarcely three centuries. On the basis of the precise
knowledge of physical relations which became available
in mathematics, physics, mechanics, and chemistry the
startling changes which have been crudely labelled the
“industrial revolution” were carried through. If the
essential relationship between the world of ideas and
the world of action were ever in doubt, the industrial
revolution, especially in its later phases, would be a
final demonstration; for beneath the ostensible skyscrapers,
subways, factories, telephone lines, and
sewers of the modern industrial city lie the immaterial
foundations of western physical science, laid down stone
by stone in the remote, theoretic researches of Boyle,
Faraday, Kelvin, Leibniz, and the rest of that great
galaxy. With the far reaching effect of the idola of
physical science it is hardly necessary to deal. Everyone
realizes how dependent the advance in technology
has been upon theoretic science, even though the scientist
himself, as Kropotkin pointed out, is sometimes slow
in admitting the debt of science itself to practical invention.
The actual world of machinery is at present,
it seems fair to say, a parasite upon this body of
knowledge, and it would speedily starve to death if the
host were annihilated.
Science has provided the factual data by means of
which the industrialist, the inventor, and the engineer
have transformed the physical world; and without
doubt the physical world has been transformed. Unfortunately,
when science has furnished the data its
work is at an end: whether one uses the knowledge of
chemicals to cure a patient or to poison one’s grandmother
is, from the standpoint of science, an extraneous
and uninteresting question. So it follows that while
science has given us the means of making over the world,
the ends to which the world has been made over have
had, essentially, nothing to do with science. Accordingly,
as I have suggested, the idola of the Country
House and Coketown and the National State, which
were built up by literature and art, have given the
effective direction to these transformations. So far,
science has not been used by people who regarded man
and his institutions scientifically. The application of
the scientific method to man and his institutions has
hardly been attempted.
Even when one qualifies this last generalization, its
outline remains pretty sharp. The development of
what are called the social sciences was dimly outlined
in Bacon’s Novum Organon; but it was not till the
eighteenth century, with Quesnay and Montesquieu,
that the movement gained any real headway, and down
to this day a large part of what is called science in
Economics, Politics, and Sociology is only disguised
literature—work in which the jargon of science is accepted
as a substitute for the scientific method of arriving
at factual truth, and in which the effort to mold
conduct overwhelms the attempt to reach correct conclusions.
Indeed, among the economists and sociologists
there has been a persistent dribble of discussion
as to whether or not their subjects entitled them to
the august designation of scientists.
It is not without reason that the social and human
sciences have been distrusted by the devotees of physical
science, so that, for example, the British Association
has long had a single section devoted to the social
sciences in which Sociology, the mother of them all, is
permitted to enter as a subclassification of Anthropology!
The nearer the investigator gets to man, the
more easily he is overwhelmed with the complexity of
his subject; and the more tempted he is to adopt the
swift and easy partisan methods of the novelist, the
poet, the prophet. The mere concealment of this act
of seduction under the rough, grey cover of scientific
jargon means frequently that the social scientist has
added to the offense of not being a good scientist by not
even being a good literary man.
Hence there is a great gap between the more external
part of the world which has been affected by
science, and that part, nearer to man and man’s institutions,
which has yet for the greater part to be conquered.
While the physical equipment of New York
compares with that of fourth century Athens as Athens
itself would compare with an Aurignacian cave, the life
of men in the city is perhaps more disordered and futile
and incomplete than the author of the Republic found
it. The moral of this contrast need hardly be pointed
in so many words. The idolum of science is incomplete;
for it chiefly touches life in its physical sector; and it
remains to complete the span so that every activity and
condition may be described, measured, and grasped in
scientific terms. With the vast modern improvement in
our physical arrangements in view, it must occur to
almost anyone that a permanent advance in social life
depends upon a much more thorough and realistic acquaintance
with the facts than the social sciences have
yet been able to provide. Before an army moves over
the land it is well for it to have moved in someone’s
mind over a topographic map. Lacking such maps,
all our day to day improvements have been wasteful
sallies into eutopia, proceeding without order, without
a sufficient equipment, and without any general plan.
There is a point up to which each science may well
be left to cultivate its field for its own sake, without
any regard for the fruits. Mr. Thorstein Veblen, in
The Place of Science in Civilization, has well pointed
out the way in which science arises out of idle curiosity;
and science, studied and advanced for its own sake, is
surely one of the great playthings of the race. In this
aspect, while science seeks a quite different path to the
contemplative life than art takes, its end is the same—the
dominant interest is an esthetic one, the joy of pure
perception. Science is thus a sort of world in itself,
and it is self-sufficient: there is no need for it to make
contact with the real world in which we fight and love
and earn our daily bread. In its own world, science is
no better and no worse than theosophy or astrology or
fables about deity.
But the divorce of science from the daily life of the
community is not altogether an advantage. If it fosters
a whole-hearted cultivation of science for its own values,
it tends to lose sight of realities without which its
values are meaningless. It is hard perhaps to locate
the point at which science, divorced from every day
realities, ceases to have any social relevance; but it
seems to me that such a point exists; and when the
sciences remain disparate and unrelated one to the
other, they tend to pass over from a public world to the
private world of the specialist; and the knowledge
which obtains in that world can with difficulty be
brought out again to irrigate the common life of the
community; or if it is brought out, as bacteriology is
brought out in relation to the treatment of disease, it
is divorced from a consideration of the total situation
in a way that makes so many specialist advances in
medicine, for example, the stamping ground for the
fanatic.
This loss of contact, I believe, is highly dangerous;
for it lessens the effect of scientific discipline upon daily
affairs quite as much as a cloistered religion, by erecting
impossible sanctions, opens the way for much unalloyed
slackness and baseness, and by demanding that Pistol
and Falstaff live like Christ prevents these biological
rapscallions from achieving so much as the level of
Robin Hood. The upshot of this dissociation of science
and social life is that superstition takes the place of
science among the common run of men, as a more easily
apprehended version of reality.
Today the whole corpus of knowledge is in an anarchic
state, and it lacks order precisely because it lacks
any definite relations to the community which creates
it, and for which it, in turn, provides the spectacles
through which the world is seen. Against the gains
that have come from the increasing specialization of
the sciences, we have to set off the losses which the community
suffers from the development of crude forms
of science, and from quackeries like astrology and spiritualism
which succeed in giving a complete account of
man’s place in the universe in terms that are fairly intelligible
to the lay mind. It seems to me, then, that
in the cultivation of the sciences a definite hierarchy
of values must be established which shall have some
relation to the essential needs of the community. The
independence of science from human values is a gross
superstition: the desire for order, for security, for
esthetically satisfactory patterns—along with the desire
for fame or the favor of princes—have all played
their parts in the development of science. Though the
logic of science may discount the human factor as far
as possible in its internal operations, it is because men
have placed a certain value upon disinterested intellectual
operations that these activities are pursued in
modern communities to the exclusion of other interests
and claims.
Let us put the problem concretely. A community
which cultivates chemical science to the point at which
it is able to wipe out a whole city by a few explosions
of poisonous gas is in a pretty treacherous situation.
If the science that it possesses has not helped to found
a eutopia, it has at any rate provided the foundations
for a kakotopia, or bad place: in short, for a hell.
Indeed scientific knowledge has not merely heightened
the possibilities of life in the modern world: it has
lowered the depths. When science is not touched by a
sense of values it works—as it fairly consistently has
worked during the past century—towards a complete
dehumanization of the social order. The plea that each
of the sciences must be permitted to go its own way
without control should be immediately rebutted by
pointing out that they obviously need a little guidance
when their applications in war and industry are so
plainly disastrous.
We must be prepared to recognize that “truths” do
not stand together on a high and lofty pedestal: some
are important and some are trivial, some are innocent
and some are dangerous, and while the pursuit of truth
is a good in itself—and complete freedom in that pursuit
is asine qua nonof a good social life—certain
departments of investigation may need to be offset and
corrected by work in other fields. In a modern Western
European community, a sociological insight into the
causes and conditions of war and peace is a needed corrective
to the crudities of applied physical science and
without such correction the mere increase of scientific
knowledge, of which we boast so vacuously, may be
highly inimical to the practice of the good life in the
community.
If the sciences are to be cultivated anew with respect
for a definite hierarchy of human values, it seems to me
that the sciences must be focussed again upon particular
local communities, and the problems which they
offer for solution. Just as geometry in Egypt arose
out of the need for annually surveying the boundaries
that the Nile wiped out, and as astronomy developed
in Chaldea in order to determine the shift of the seasons
for the planting of crops, as geology in modern
times developed out of the questions that a practical
stone mason, like Hugh Miller, found himself confronted
with—so may the sciences which are today incomplete
and partial develop along the necessary lines by a survey
of existing conditions and intellectual resources in
a particular community.
On one hand, science must be in contact with the
whole idolum of scientific thought—with that vast overworld
of scientific effort which is the product of no
single place or people or time. On the other hand,
it must be related to the definite local community, limited
in time and in space, in which its researches and
its speculations will be realized and applied. Out of
these surveys of existing conditions we should find, I
believe, that in social psychology, in anthropology, in
economics there are a vast number of facts and relations
which remain to be described; and that, similarly,
certain departments like craniology and jurisprudence
and folklore have been vastly overcultivated in proportion
to any genuine importance that their researches
may have upon our control over the community’s development.
Such an investigation would bring out,
above all, the weakness of contemporary sociological
thought, with its diabetic flatulence of special sociologies,
and its lack of any general agreement as to the
field which is to be cultivated.
Apart from its great function as a plaything, science
is valuable only to the extent that its researches can be
brought to bear upon the conditions in a particular
community, in a definite region. The difference between
science as a plaything and science as an instrument
for enabling us to establish more effective relations with
other men and with the rest of our environment, is the
difference between firing a shot at a target and firing
at a buck for provender. The practice one gets in
firing at a target is great fun, and incidentally it
improves one’s marksmanship; such idle sport is perhaps
one of the stigmata of a civilized community.
Nevertheless, unless one’s skill can be definitely brought
home it remains a personal achievement; and the community
as a whole is not a pound of meat the better
for it. If science is to play the significant part that
Bacon and Andreæ and Plato and the other great
humanists desired it to, it must be definitely brought
home and realized in our here and now.
The need for this humanization of science has already
been perceived in Great Britain. During the last decade
a movement has gathered headway in the schools
and extended itself to associations outside the schools.
The title of this movement is “Regional Survey,” and
its point of origin is, I believe, the Outlook Tower
in Edinburgh which was well described more than two
decades ago as the “world’s first sociological laboratory.”
The aim of the Regional Survey is to take a geographic
region and explore it in every aspect. It differs
from the social survey with which we are acquainted
in America in that it is not chiefly a survey of
evils; it is, rather, a survey of the existing conditions in
all their aspects; and it emphasizes to a much greater
extent than the social survey the natural characteristics
of the environment, as they are discovered by the
geologist, the zoologist, the ecologist—in addition to
the development of natural and human conditions in the
historic past, as presented by the anthropologist, the
archæologist, and the historian. In short, the regional
survey attempts a local synthesis of all the specialist
“knowledges.”
Such a survey has been conducted in the Southeastern
counties of England under the auspices of various local
scientific societies; and the result of it is a complete
description of the community’s foundations, its past, its
manner of working and living, its institutions, its regional
peculiarities, and its utilization of physical, vital,
and social resources. Each of the sciences draws upon
its general body of knowledge to illuminate the points
under observation; and when problems arise which point
definitely to the lack of scientific or scholarly data, new
trails are opened and new territory defined.
In looking at the community through the Regional
Survey, the investigator is dealing with a real thing
and not with an arbitrary idolum. In so far as the
local community has certain elements in common with
similar regions in other countries, or has absorbed
elements from other civilizations, these things will be
given their full value, instead of being disregarded because
they weaken the identity of the local community
with that precious myth, the National State. The
greater part of the data that is thus brought to light
may be plotted on a map, graphically presented in a
chart, or photographed. In Saffron Walden, England,
there is an admirable little museum devoted to such
an exhibition of its region; and in the Outlook Tower,
at Edinburgh, there used to be a library and an
apparatus of exhibition by which one could begin at
the point where one was standing and work outwards,
in thought, to embrace the whole wide world. Knowledge
that is presented in this fashion is available so
that whoever runs may read; it has every feature,
therefore, of popular science as it is purveyed in the
cheap newspaper and magazine, whilst it remains real
science and is not presented as something that verges
from a miracle to a superstition.
The knowledge embodied in the Regional Survey has
a coherence and pithiness which no isolated study of
science can possibly possess. It is presented in such a
form that it can be assimilated by every member of the
community who has the rudiments of an education,
and it thus differs from the isolated discipline which
necessarily remains the heritage of the specialist. Above
all, this knowledge is not that of “subjects,” taken as
so many water tight and unrelated compartments:
it is a knowledge of a whole region, seen in all its
aspects; so that the relations between the work aspect
and the soil aspect, between the play aspect and the
work aspect, become fairly simple and intelligible.
This common tissue of definite, verifiable, localized
knowledge is what all our partisan utopias and reconstruction
programs have lacked; and lacking it, have
been one-sided and ignorant and abstract—devising
paper programs for the reconstruction of a paper
world.
Regional survey, then, is the bridge by which the
specialist whose face is turned towards the library and
the laboratory, and the active worker in the field, whose
face is turned towards the city and region in which he
lives, may come into contact; and out of this contact
our plans and our eutopias may be founded on such a
permanent foundation of facts as the scientist can build
for us, while the sciences themselves will be cultivated
with some regard for the human values and standards,
as embodied in the needs and the ideals of the local community.
This is the first step out of the present impasse:
we must return to the real world, and face it,
and survey it in its complicated totality. Our castles-in-air
must have their foundations in solid ground.
The needed reorientation of science is important;
but by itself it is not enough. Knowledge is a tool
rather than a motor; and if we know the world without
being able to react upon it, we are guilty of that aimless
pragmatism which consists of devising all sorts of
ingenious machines and being quite incapable of subordinating
them to any coherent and attractive pattern.
Now, men are moved by their instinctive impulses
and by such emotionally colored pattern-ideas or idola
as the dreamer is capable of projecting. When we
create these pattern-ideas, we enlarge the environment,
so that our behavior is guided by the conditions which
we seek to establish and enjoy in an imaginary world.
However crude the Marxian analysis of society may
have been, it at least had the merit of presenting a
great dream—the dream of a titanic struggle between
the possessors and the dispossessed in which every
worker had a definite part to play. Without these
dreams, the advances in social science will be just as
disorderly and fusty as the applications of physical
science have been in our material affairs, where in the
absence of any genuine scale of values, a patent collar
button is regarded as equally important as a tungsten
filament if the button happens to bring the inventor as
great a financial reward.
Up to about the middle of the seventeenth century,
before modern physical science had rigorously defined
its field, the breach between literature and science,
which Aristotle had made, was not altogether complete;
and while the humanist ideal was intact both literature
and science were regarded as coeval phases of man’s
intellectual activity. The two dominating figures of
the Renascence, Leonardo da Vinci and Michael Angelo,
were artists, technicians, and men of science;
and in a comparison between a translation of Michael
Angelo’s sonnets and a photograph of St. Peter’s the
sonnets come off rather well.
The great contribution of the Renascence was the
ideal of fully energized human beings, able to span life
in all its manifestations, as artists, scientists, technicians,
philosophers, and what not. This ideal exercised
a powerful influence on lesser figures, like the
Admirable Crichton and Sir Walter Raleigh, and even
down to the time of Descartes it contributed to that
exuberance of the intellectual life which was the Renascence
at its best. When John Amos Comenius wrote
his remarkable little book called The Labyrinth of the
World and the Paradise of the Heart in 1623, he
combined the outlooks of science and art in a remarkable
synthesis; for the first part of this work is a
picturesque survey of the actual world as Comenius
found it, and the second a picture of the transition to
the heavenly world promised in the Christian religion.
The idea behind Comenius’ Labyrinth was the same
that inspired Andreæ; and were it not for the complete
otherworldliness of this theological utopia, the Paradise
of the Heart, Comenius’ discourse would take a
high place in the history of utopian thought.
There is no genuine logical basis, as far as I can see,
in the dissociation of science and art, of knowing and
dreaming, of intellectual activities and emotional activities.
The division between the two is simply one of
convenience; for both these activities are simply different
modes in which human beings create order out
of the chaos in which they find themselves. Such is
the humanist view. As an instance of this, when the
Royal Society was projected in England in the middle
of the seventeenth century, Johann Andreæ advised his
friend Samuel Hartlib, then in London, not to neglect
the humanities while furthering the pursuit of the physical
sciences. Unfortunately, the men who gathered
together to form the Royal Society were specialists in
physical science; and in the lapse of the humanist tradition
through the religious acerbities of the time, they
had lost some of their desire for a complete life. As a
result, the original charter of the society confined its
work to the physical sciences.
Insignificant as it now appears in the annals of science,
this decision seems to me to mark a definite turning
point in human thought. Henceforth the scientist was
to be one sort of person and the artist another; henceforth
the idolum of science and the idolum of art were
not to be cemented together in a single personality;
henceforth, in fact, the dehumanization of art and science
begins. It is interesting to note that with the
divorce of the humanities from science, art and science
entered upon separate careers which, for all their diversities,
are curiously similar. Both art and science,
for example, ceased to be the common property of the
community; and each of them split up into a multiplying
host of specialisms. In this process, art and
science made many notable advances; so that this
period is usually spoken of as a period of enlightenment
or progress; but the result on the community was
what we discovered in our examination of Coketown and
the Country House.
We must now consider the development of the arts
in the modern community. At the height of the Middle
Age, as in fifth century Athens, the arts formed together
a living unity. A citizen did not go into a
concert hall to hear music, to a church to say his
prayers, to a theatre to see a play, to a picture gallery
to view pictures: it was a mean town, indeed, that could
not boast a cathedral and a couple of churches; and
in these buildings, drama and music and architecture
and painting and sculpture were united for the purpose
of ringing changes on the emotional nature of men and
converting them to accept the theological vision of
otherworldly utopia.
The splitting up of these arts into a number of separate
boxes was part of that movement towards individualism
and protestantism whose effects most people are
familiar with in the field of religion alone. Henceforward,
music, drama, painting, and the other arts developed
largely in isolation; and each of them was forced
to build up a separate world. The greater part of the
gains that were made in these worlds was not carried
over into the community at large, but remained the
possession of the artists themselves or their private
patrons and critics in the Country House. With such
exceptions as the Italian and Japanese woodcuts of
the eighteenth century, and the few survivals of ballad
and drama that slipt over from the Middle Age, popular
art became another name for all that was coarse
and stunted and depressed. The popular architecture
of the nineteenth century is the sordid little redbrick
rabbit hutch: popular religion is embodied in the
stunted sheet-iron or brick chapel (as it is called in
England) of the Baptists and Methodists: popular
music is the latest barrel organ lilt: popular painting
is the calendar lithograph: and popular literature is
the dime novel.
The divorce of the art of the cultivated classes from
that of the whole community tended to deprive it of
any other standards than the artist himself was content
to erect. Here again the comparison with science
is curiously pertinent. The world of art is in a sense
a separate world, and it can be cultivated for a time
without reference to the desires and emotions of the
community out of which it has sprung. But the motto
“Art for art’s sake” turns out in practice to be something
quite different—namely, art for the artist’s sake;
and art which is produced in this manner, without any
external standard of performance, is frequently just an
instrument for overcoming a neurosis or enabling the
artist to restore his personal equilibrium. Divorced
from his community, the artist was driven back upon
himself: instead of seeking to create a beauty which
all men might share, he devoted himself to projecting
a poignant angle of his personal vision—an angle which
I shall call the picturesque. The cause of this divorce
I have already pointed out in the chapter on the
Country House; it is with the effects of this divorce,
for which the artist was not greatly to blame, that we
are here concerned.
This conflict between “beauty” and the “picturesque”
is perhaps common to all the arts, and with sufficient
factual detail I might be able to trace its effects on
literature and music. For the sake of clearness and
simplicity I shall confine myself to painting and sculpture,
with the proviso that our conclusions will apply,
by and large, to the whole field.
Let me emphasize, before going any further, that I
am using the terms “beauty” and the “picturesque”
in quite different senses from the vague ones that are
usually attached to them; and that I use them without
any preliminary judgment as to their place and value
in the good life. The picturesque, in the quite arbitrary
sense in which the word is used here, is an abstract
quality of vision, sound, or meaning which creates
what we might call pure esthetic experience. In painting,
the picturesque probably arose with the discovery,
on the part of the leisured classes in the Country
House, that it was possible to achieve rapture, a sort
of esthetic trance, a complete state of beatitude, by
the more or less prolonged contemplation of a pictorial
subject. Up to the time of this discovery, painting
was simply a branch of interior decoration; the great
paintings of the Christian World served, for the public,
as illustrations to that outline of history which
mediæval theology provided: they had a habitat, a
social destination.
With the splitting off of the picturesque from the
main body of ecclesiastical art, painting came into
its own as an end in itself, apart from any place
that it might have in the scheme of the community’s
affairs. The symptom of this change is the rise of
landscape painting: in the search for pure esthetic
experience the painter began to look for themes which
were divorced from any human interest but that of pure
contemplation. During the last century this split between
painting as a form of social art and painting as
a means of achieving contemplative ecstasy has become
deeper: even those academic painters who followed the
methods of the older artists no longer have the same
field to work in, whilst the revolutionist—the impressionists
of one period, the cubists of another, and the
post-impressionists or expressionists of a third—are
forced by the general irrelevance of art in Coketown
to produce work which only the more or less initiate
will appreciate.
Now, I would not for worlds underrate the gains
which have been achieved by the divorce of art from the
whole life of the community. In their isolation from
the social group that produced them the modern artists
have been able to pursue their solitary way to limits
which the common man is probably incapable of reaching:
they have widened the field of esthetic delight and
have introduced new values into the world of painting,
values which will remain even though the disease which
created them disappears, just as one can salvage a
pearl from an oyster whose sickness is healed. The
view from the mountain top is none the worse because
many people are afflicted with dizziness and nausea
before they have reached the summit; and, like the
pursuit of truth, the pursuit of esthetic values is a
good in itself apart from any values which may be
realized in the community. On these terms, Cézanne and
Van Gogh and Ryder, to mention a few of the dead, will
hold their own, and keep the boundaries of art from
ever shrinking again, I trust, to its academic limits.
Nevertheless, the effects of focussing on the picturesque
can no more be overlooked in art than the dangers
of specialization in science. It is almost a banality
to point out how, historically, as the picturesque developed
in art, beauty has tended to disappear from life.
Whilst the cultivated few have become gloriously alive
to more exquisite sensations than their ancestors had
probably ever experienced, the “mutilated many” have
been forced to live in great cities and in abject country
towns of a blackness and ugliness such as the world,
if we are to judge by the records that exist, has never
seen before. In other words, we have become more sensitive
to experiences—to the contents of our inner worlds—only
to become more callous to things, to the brash
surfaces of the world without. In our preoccupation
with the inner worlds we have to a large extent lost
our hold upon beauty, which, in the limiting sense in
which the word is used here, is the quality by which
anything, from a torso to a building, shows its adaptation
to an end and its sensitiveness to esthetic values—values
which are abstracted and intensified in the pure
picturesque—that are involved in such an adaptation.
In this sense, the beautiful, as Emerson said, rests on
the foundations of the necessary: it is the outward
token of an inward grace; its appearance is the manifestation
of a humanized life; and its existence and
development constitute, in fact, a sort of index to a
community’s vitality.
The divorce of the artist from the community, and
the turning away of his energies from beauty, in which
the picturesque might be fulfilled, to the picturesque
itself, separate from any practical needs, has scarcely
been compensated by the advances that have been made
in the separate world of art. The result has been that
work which should have been done by artists of great
capacity has been done by people of minor or degraded
ability. Anonymous jerrybuilders have erected the
greater number of our houses, absurd engineers have
laid out our towns with no thought for anything but
sewers and paving contracts; rapacious and illiterate
men who have achieved success in business discourse to
the multitude on what constitutes the good life—and
so on. There is really no end to the number of things
which we do badly in the modern community, for want
of the artist to do them at all.
This generalization applies to the whole range of
the arts. The greater part of the creative dreaming
and planning which constitutes literature and art has
had very little bearing upon the community in which we
live, and has done little to equip us with patterns, with
images and ideals, by means of which we might react
creatively upon our environment. Yet it should be obvious
that if the inspiration for the good life is to come
from anywhere, it must come from no other people than
the great artists. An intense social life, as Gabriel
Tarde pointed out in his fine utopian fantasy, Underground
Man, has “for its indispensable condition the
esthetic life and the universal propagation of the religion
of truth and beauty.” The common man, when he
is in love, has a little glimpse of the way in which the
drudgery of the daily world may be transmuted through
emotional stimulus; it is the business of the artist to
make the transmutation permanent, for the only difference
between the artist and the common man is that
the artist is, so to say, in love all the while. It is
out of the vivid patterns of the artist’s ecstasy that
he draws men together and gives them the vision to
shape their lives and the destiny of their community
anew.
No matter how the modern artist may use or fritter
away his abilities, it is plain that he has an enormous
reservoir of power at his disposal. What, for
instance, has made America so wholly devoted to the
conquest of material things? Why are we so given
over to collecting those vast miscellanies of goods which
are temptingly displayed in the advertising sections
of our illustrated weeklies and monthly magazines?
The necessity for ameliorating the hard, crude life of
the pioneer has indeed been an important influence;
but the traditions of this life in turn produced all the
minor “artists” or “artlings” who write and draw for
the popular papers, who create the plots of plays
and motion picture scenarios; and since most of these
poor wretches have never been educated in the humanist
sense to any degree—since they know no other environment
than New York or Los Angeles or Gopher Prairie,
since they are acquainted with the achievements of no
other age than their own, they have devoted themselves
wholeheartedly to idealizing a great many of the things
that are crude or ugly or stupid in their beloved community.
So the idola of business have been perpetuated
by “artlings” who themselves know only the standards
of the business man.
Because of the limited horizons of the American
artist, therefore, the rising generation aspires after the
things that Messrs. Jack London, Rupert Hughes,
Scott Fitzgerald, and heaven knows who else have
thought good and fine; the younger generation talks
like the heroes and heroines of a melodrama by Mr.
Samuel Shipman, when they do not attain the higher
level of comic cuts; the younger generation thrills to
the type of beauty which Mr. Penryhn Stanlaws sets before
its gaze. The notion that the common man despises
art is absurd. The common man worships art
and lives by it; and when good art is not available he
takes the second best or the tenth best or the hundredth
best. The success of Mr. Eugene O’Neil, one of the few
playwrights of any girth who has contributed to the
American stage, proves that the only way that people
can be kept away from good art is by not providing it.
The younger generation might just as well have had
its idea-patterns shaped by Sophocles, Praxiteles, and
Plato, if our genuine artists were not so aloof to their
responsibilities, and if they were intellectually mature
enough to accept the full burden of their vocation. It
is a sign of a terrific neurosis—and no mark at all of
esthetic aptitude—that our genuine art is so completely
disoriented and so thoroughly out of touch with
the community. We must turn to a man of such
uneven parts as Mr. Nicholas Vachel Lindsay before
we have anything like a recognition of the classic rôle
of the artist.
Art for the artist’s sake is largely a symptom of that
neurotic individualism which drives the artist out of a
public world which baffles him into a private world
where he may reign in solitude as an unruly demiurge.
Art for the public’s sake, on the other hand, substitutes
the vices of the extrovert for the vices of the
introvert. When I say that art must have some vital
contact with the community I do not mean, let me
emphasize, that the artist must cater to public whim
or demand. Art in its social setting is neither a personal
cathartic for the artist, nor a salve to quiet the
itching vanity of the community: it is essentially a
means by which people who have had a strange diversity
of experiences have their activities emotionally
canalized into patterns and molds which they are able
to share pretty completely with each other. Pure
art is inevitably propaganda. I mean by this that it
is meant to be propagated, and that in so far as it
fails to impregnate the community in which it exists
with its ideas and images, in so far as the community
is not changed for better or worse by its existence, its
claims are spurious. Propagandist art, on the other
hand, is inevitably impure since instead of bringing
people together on a common emotional plane, as men,
it tends to accentuate their differences, and to void
emotions which are proper to art into a realm where
the emotions of the missionary’s tent or the soapboxer’s
platform hold exclusive sway. It is just because
the “artist” in America has been impure in
motive—a propagandist for Pollyanna in the face of
Euripides, a propagandist for “just folks” in the face
of Swift, a propagandist for niceness in the face of
Rabelais—that he has failed miserably as an artist,
and has left our communities to stew so completely in
their own savorless juice.
For examples of what the artist might be, and what
his proper relation to the community might be when
he was mature enough to recognize it and discipline
himself to it, let us look at Mr. William Butler Yeats
or A. E. There are doubtless a good many other examples
that might be offered in Europe; but these are
particularly good; for the reason that with A. E. one
can see in his The National Being how the conceptions
of art enter into the tissues of all his plans for renovating
life in the Irish Countryside. In the work of these
artists and their fellows we have a clue to one of the
most promising attempts to establish a concrete eutopia
which shall rise out of the real facts of the everyday
environment and, at the same time, turn upon them
and mold them creatively a little nearer the heart’s
desire.
In the account of Four Years which Mr. Yeats
published in The Dial he explains his attitude towards
the literature and social life of Ireland; and I recommend
that account to all the forlorn revolutionaries
and reformers who wonder why the dry bones of their
doctrines remain dry bones, instead of knitting themselves
together and becoming alive. This passage in
particular, defines the relation of the artist both to
the tradition of his art and to the community in which
he must find a root:
“The Huxley, Tyndall, Carolus Duran, Bastien-Lepage
coven, asserted that an artist or a poet must
paint or write in the style of his own day, and this with
the Fairy Queen and the Lyrical Ballads and Blake’s
early poems in its ears, and plain to the eyes, in book
and gallery, those great masterpieces of later Egypt,
founded upon that work of the ancient kingdom already
further in time from Later Egypt than Later Egypt is
from us.” He dismisses this claim with the just assertion
that the artist is free to choose any style that suits
his mood and subject; for in the world of art time and
space are irrelevant; and he goes on to say, “We had in
Ireland imaginative stories, which the uneducated
classes knew and even sang, and might we not make
those stories current among the educated classes, rediscovering,
for the work’s sake, what I have called ‘the
applied arts of literature,’ the association of literature,
that is, with music, speech, and dance; and at last, it
might be, so deepen the political passion of the nation
that all, artist and poet, craftsman and day laborer,
would accept a common design. Perhaps even these
images, once created and associated with river and
mountain, might move of themselves and with some
powerful, even turbulent life, like those painted horses
that trample the rice-fields of Japan.”
By citing Mr. Yeats’ conceptions I do not mean to
limit the artist to a single function—that of patterning
the good life. It is quite plain that pure esthetic
experience is a good in itself; and when the artist has
rendered this experience in a picture, a poem, a novel,
a philosophy, he has performed a unique and indispensable
piece of work. Could italics keep this passage
from being ignored I should employ them.
What I have called the picturesque is in reality just
as self-sustaining and delightful as the radiant good
health which Sir Thomas More rated so highly in his
Utopia. If the community went to the dogs, it would
still be exuberantly self-sustaining, whilst anyone had
the time or the capacity to enjoy it. What I protest
against is the way in which the field of the genuine
artist, during these last three hundred years, has been
whittled away, so that it has become more and more a
mark of the artist to concern himself solely with the
narrow province of pure esthetic experience, and to
protest his complete aloofness from anything that lies
outside this realm. Such an attitude would have struck
Euripides or Milton or Goethe or Wagner as undignified
and stupid, I am sure, because art is as large
as life, and it does not gain in vigor or intensity by
reducing its scope to that of the puppet stage. The
point is that there is an artistic function to be performed
in the community, for the community, as well
as in the world of art, for those who are lifted up to art.
“Nations, races, and individual men,” as Mr. Yeats
says again, “are unified by an image, or a bundle of
related images, symbolical and provocative of the state
of mind that is of all states of mind not impossible, the
most difficult to that man, race, or nation because only
the greatest obstacle that can be contemplated without
despair rouses the will to full intensity.”
Whether these images shall be provided by patrioteers,
hack editors, politicians, advertising men and
commercialized “artists” or whether they shall be created
by genuine playwrights and poets and philosophers
is an important question. The function of creating
these images is an artistic one, and the artist who evades
his responsibility is making life for himself and his
kind more difficult, since in the long run a community
whose sacred literature is written by Colonel Diver
and Scadder and Jefferson Brick—the great heroes of
Civilization as the star of empire westward makes its
way—will make even the most solitary cultivation of
the arts a thorny and difficult task.
In the good life, the purely esthetic element has a
prominent place; but unless the artist is capable of
moving men to the good life, the esthetic element is
bound to be driven farther and farther away from the
common realities, until the world of the artist will
scarcely be distinguishable from the phantasia of
dementia præcox. Already, the symptoms of this corrosive
futility have appeared in literature and painting
in Western Europe and America; and such light as
comes forth from this art is but the phosphorescence
of decay. If the arts are not to disintegrate utterly,
must they not focus more and more upon eutopia?
It comes to this then: our plans for a new social
order have been as dull as mud because, in the first
place, they have been abstract and cockney, and have
not taken into account the immense diversity and complexity
of man’s environment; and in the second place,
they have not created any vivid patterns that would
move men to great things. They have not been “informed
by science and ennobled by the arts.”
Through the paralysis of the arts and sciences our
contemporary programs for revolution and reform have
done very little to lift our heads over the disorderly and
bedraggled environments in which we conduct our daily
business. This failure to create a common pattern for
the good life in each region has made such excellent
efforts as the garden city movement seem weak and
ineffectual when we place them alongside the towns that
mediæval civilization, which had such a common pattern,
created. Without the common background of eutopian
idola, all our efforts at rehabilitation—the new architecture,
the garden city movement, the electrification
of industry, the organization of great industrial guilds
such as the Building Trades have achieved in England
and the garment workers seem on the point of effecting
in America—without these common idola, I say, all
our practical efforts are spotty and inconsecutive and
incomplete. It was not, let us remember, by any legislative
device that the cities of the industrial age were
monotonously patterned in the image of Coketown. It
was rather because everyone within these horrid centers
accepted the same values and pursued the same
ends—as they were projected by economists like
Ricardo, industrialists like Stephenson, and lyric poets
like Samuel Smiles—that the plans of the jerrybuilder
and the engineer expressed to perfection the brutality
and social disharmony of the community. The same
process that gave us Coketown can, when our world of
ideas is transformed, give us something better than
Coketown.
The chief use of the classic utopias that we have
surveyed is to suggest that the same methods which
are used by the utopian thinkers to project an ideal
community on paper may be employed, in a practical
way, to develop a better community on earth. The
weakness of the utopian thinkers consisted in the assumption
that the dreams and projects of any single
man might be realized in society at large. From the
bitter frustration of Fourier, Cabet, Hertzka, and even
John Ruskin those who are in search of the beloved
community may well take a warning. Where the critics
of the utopian method were, I believe, wrong was in holding
that the business of projecting prouder worlds
was a futile and footling pastime. These anti-utopian
critics overlooked the fact that one of the main factors
that condition any future are the attitudes and beliefs
which people have in relation to that future—that, as
Mr. John Dewey would say, in any judgment of practise
one’s belief in a hypothesis is one of the things that
affect its realization.
When we have projected the pattern of an ideal
community and tend to warp our conduct in conformity
with that pattern, we overcome the momentum of actual
institutions. In feeling free to project new patterns,
in holding that human beings can will a change in their
institutions and habits of life, the utopians were, I
believe, on solid ground; and the utopian philosophies
were a great improvement over the more nebulous religious
and ethical systems of the past in that they saw
the necessity for giving their ideals form and life.
In fact, it has been in the pictures of ideal commonwealths
such as Plato’s that the “ideal” and the “actual”
have met.
It is true that the pure utopians have overlooked the
fact that every institution has a momentum of its own:
its speed may be quickened or reduced, it may be
switched on another track, as the Roman Church
during the Reformation was switched from the main
line of civilization to a subsidiary route; and at times,
in the catastrophe of war or revolution, an institution
may jump the track altogether and be wrecked. The
critical problem for the eutopian, the problem of the
transition from one set of institutions to another,
from one way of life to another, was overlooked. Plato’s
Republic, for example, was a fairly attractive place;
but one wonders in what Greek city in the Fourth Century
B.C. the transition could have taken place. A
transition implies not merely a goal but a starting
point: if we are to move the world, as Archimedes
threatened to with his lever, we must have some ground
to stand on. It is only by paying attention to the
limitations of each region, and by allowing for the
driving force of history, that we can make the earth
come to terms with man’s idola. This is perhaps the
most difficult lesson that the eutopian must learn.
What, then, is the first step out of the present disorder?
The first step, it seems to me, is to ignore all
the fake utopias and social myths that have proved
either so sterile or so disastrous during the last few
centuries. There is perhaps no logical reason why the
myth of the national state should not be preserved;
but it is a myth which has done very little, on the whole,
to promote the good life, and has on the contrary done
a great deal to make the good life impossible; and to
continue to cling to it in the face of perpetual wars,
pestilences, and spiritual devastations is the sort of
fanaticism which will probably seem as blind and cruel
to future generations as persecutions for Christian
heresy do to the present one. On the same grounds,
there are a number of other social myths, like the proletarian
myth, which run so badly against the grain of
reality that they cannot be preserved without ignoring
a great many values which are essential to a humane
existence; and on pragmatic grounds it would be fine
and beneficial to drop them quickly into limbo. There
is no reason to think that there will be a quick conversion
from these myths: the holocaust of war has
only intensified the myth of the National State; and our
experience with religious myths suggests on the contrary
that the forms at any rate will be preserved long
after the last shred of reality has disappeared. But
the sooner those who are capable of intellectual criticism
abandon these particular myths, the sooner will
these idola fall into the state which has been happily
described as “innocuous desuetude.”
If our knowledge of human behavior counts for anything,
however, we cannot put aside old myths without
creating new ones. The eighteenth century agnostics
very wisely realized that if they wished to maintain
the values which had been created by Deism, they could
not abandon God without inventing him all over again.
In turning away from obsolete and disastrous social
myths I do not suggest that we give up the habit of
making myths; for that habit, for good or bad, seems
to be ingrained in the human psyche. The nearest we
can get to rationality is not to efface our myths but
to attempt to infuse them with right reason, and to
alter them or exchange them for other myths when
they appear to work badly.
Here is where we reap the full benefit of the great
utopian tradition. In turning away from the social
myths that hamper us, we do not jump blindly into a
blankness: we rather ally ourselves with a different
order of social myth which has always been vivified and
enriched by the arts and sciences.
The idolum of eutopia which we may seek to project
in this or that region is not a carte blanche which any
one may fill in at his will and caprice; certain lines
have already been fixed; certain spaces have already
been filled. There is a consensus among all utopian
writers, to begin with, that the land and natural resources
belong undividedly to the community; and even
when it is worked by separate people or associations, as
in Utopia and Freeland the increment of the land—the
economic rent—belongs to the community as a whole.
There is also a pretty common notion among the Utopians
that, as land is a common possession, so is work
a common function; and no one is let off from some
sort of labor of body or mind because of any inherited
privileges or dignities that he can point to. Finally,
there is the almost equally common notion, among the
utopians, that the perpetuation of the species leaves
plenty of room for improvement, and that, as far as
human knowledge and foresight are worth anything, it
should be applied to propagation; so that the most reckless
and ill-bred shall not burden the community with
the support of their offspring while those of finer
capacity are neglected or overwhelmed in numbers.
Besides these general conditions for the good life
which the utopians unite to emphasize, there are certain
other points in the utopian tradition of which one
writer or another has given the classic statement.
With Plato we see the enormous importance of birth
and education; we recognize the part good breeding,
in every sense of the word, must play in the good community.
Sir Thomas More makes us aware of the fact
that a community becomes a community to the extent
that it has shared possessions, and he suggests that the
local group might develop such a common life as the
old colleges of Oxford have enjoyed. When we turn to
Christianopolis, we are reminded that the daily life and
work of the community must be infused with the spirit
of science, and that an acute practical intelligence such
as we find today among the engineers need not be
divorced from the practice of the humanities. Even the
nineteenth century utopias have a contribution to make.
They remind us by their overemphasis that all the proud
and mighty idealisms in the world are so many shadows
unless they are supported by the whole economic fabric—so
that “eutopia” is not merely a matter of spiritual
conversion, as the ancient religions taught, but of economic
and geotechnic reconstruction. Finally, from
James Buckingham and Ebenezer Howard we can learn
the importance of converting the idolum of eutopia into
plans and layouts and detailed projections, such as a
townplanner might utilize; and we may suspect that a
eutopia which cannot be converted into such specific
plans will continue, as the saying is, to remain up in
the air.
Taken together, there is a powerful impulse towards
creating a good environment for the good life in the
classic utopias we have examined: from one or another
utopia we may draw elements which will enrich every
part of the community’s life. By following the utopian
tradition we shall not merely escape from the fake
utopias that have dominated us: we shall return to
reality. More than that, we shall return upon reality
and perhaps—who can tell?—we shall re-create it!
In discussing the foundations of Eutopia I am conscious
of a certain abstractness in my method of argument;
conscious that I have not been a good utopian
in dealing with these proud idola that we may project
in every region. Let us come down to earth now and
realize what all this amounts to when we turn away
from the library and mingle again on the highways that
lead past our door.
First of all, I conceive that we shall not attempt to
envisage a single utopia for a single unit called humanity;
that is the sort of thin and tepid abstraction
which the discipline of the Regional Survey will tend
to kill off even in people who are now inured by education
to dealing only in verbal things. All the human
beings on the planet are a unity only for the sake of
talking about them; and as far as that goes, there
is very little profitable conversation that can apply to
a Greenlander, a Parisian, and a Chinaman, except the
mere observation that they are all on the same little
boat of a planet and would probably be much
happier if they minded their own business and were
not too insistent about inflicting their institutions and
their idola upon their neighbors.
We shall have to dismiss, as equally futile, the notion
of a single stratification of mankind, such as the working
class, serving as the foundation for our Eutopia:
the notion that the working class consists simply of
urban workers is a cockney imbecility, and as soon as
one rectifies it and includes the agricultural population,
we have “humanity” pretty much all over again.
Finally, if we are to give eutopia a local habitation
it will not be founded upon the National State, for the
National State is a myth which sane people will no more
sacrifice their lives to than they would hand their children
into the furnace of some tribal Moloch; and a
good idolum cannot be founded on the basis of a
bad one.
As far as extent or character of territory goes, we
will remember that the planet is not as smooth as a
billiard ball, and that the limits of any genuine community
rest within fairly ascertainable geographic regions
in which a certain complex of soil, climate, industry,
institutional life and historic heritage has prevailed.
We shall not attempt to legislate for all these
communities at one stroke; for we shall respect William
Blake’s dictum that one law for the lion and the ox is
tyranny. There are some 15,000,000 local communities
in the world, the Postal Directory tells us; and
our eutopia will necessarily take root in one of these
real communities, and include within its co-operations
as many other communities, as have similar interests
and identities. It may be that our eutopia will embrace
a population as great as that in the Metropolis of
London or New York; but it is needless to say that the
land which lies beyond the limits of the metropolis will
no longer be regarded as a sort of subterranean factory
for the production of agricultural goods. In
sum, as Patrick Geddes has finely said, in the Kingdom
of Eutopia—the world Eutopia—there will be many
mansions.
The inhabitants of our eutopias will have a familiarity
with their local environment and its resources,
and a sense of historic continuity, which those who
dwell within the paper world of Megalopolis and who
touch their environment mainly through the newspaper
and the printed book, have completely lost. The people
of Newcastle will no longer go to London for coals,
as the people in the provinces have in a sense been
doing this last century and more: there will be a more
direct utilization of local resources than would have
seemed profitable or seemly to the metropolitan world
which now has command of the market. In these varied
eutopias, it is safe to say, there will be a new realization
of the fact that a cultivated life is essentially a
settled life: their citizens will have discovered that the
great privilege of travelling from Brooklyn to Bermondsey,
and from Bermondsey to Bombay is scarcely
worth the trouble when the institutions of Brooklyn,
Bermondsey, and Bombay, and every other purely industrial
center, are identical—sanitary drinking devices
and canned goods and moving pictures being the same
wherever mechanical duplication of goods for a world
market has taken the place of direct adaptation to
local needs.
It should not surprise us therefore if the foundations
of eutopia were established in ruined countries; that
is, in countries where metropolitan civilization has
collapsed and where all its paper prestige is no longer
accepted at its paper value. There was the beginning
of a genuine eutopian movement in Denmark after the
war with Germany in the ’sixties: under the leadership
of Bishop Gruntwig came a revival of folk traditions
in literature and a renascence of education which has
renewed the life of the Danish countryside and made
an intelligent farmer and an educated man out of the
boor. It would not be altogether without precedent
if such a eutopian renascence took place in Germany,
in Austria, in Russia; and perhaps on another scale
in India and China and Palestine; for all these regions
are now face to face with realities which the “prosperous”
paperism of our metropolitan civilization has
largely neglected.
If the inhabitants of our Eutopias will conduct their
daily affairs in a possibly more limited environment than
that of the great metropolitan centers, their mental
environment will not be localized or nationalized. For
the first time perhaps in the history of the planet our
advance in science and invention has made it possible
for every age and every community to contribute to
the spiritual heritage of the local group; and the citizen
of eutopia will not stultify himself by being, let us say,
a hundred per cent Frenchman when Greece, China,
England, Scandinavia and Russia can give sustenance
to his spiritual life. Our eutopians will necessarily
draw from this wider environment whatever can be
assimilated by the local community; and they will thus
add any elements that may be lacking in the natural
situation.
The chief business of eutopians was summed up by
Voltaire in the final injunction of Candide: Let us
cultivate our garden. The aim of the real eutopian is
the culture of his environment, most distinctly not the
culture, and above all not the exploitation, of some other
person’s environment. Hence the size of our Eutopia
may be big or little; it may begin in a single village;
it may embrace a whole region. A little leaven will
leaven the whole loaf; and if a genuine pattern for the
eutopian life plants itself in any particular locality
it may ramify over a whole continent as easily as Coketown
duplicated itself throughout the Western World.
The notion that no effective change can be brought
about in society until millions of people have deliberated
upon it and willed it is one of the rationalizations which
are dear to the lazy and the ineffectual. Since the first
step towards eutopia is the reconstruction of our idola,
the foundations for eutopia can be laid, wherever we
are, without further ado.
Our most important task at the present moment is to
build castles in the air. We need not fear, as Thoreau
reminds us, that the work will be lost. If our eutopias
spring out of the realities of our environment, it will
be easy enough to place foundations under them.
Without a common design, without a grand design, all
our little bricks of reconstruction might just as well
remain in the brickyard; for a disharmony between
men’s minds betokens, in the end, the speedy dilapidation
of whatever they may build. Our final word is a
counsel of perfection. When that which is perfect has
come, that which is imperfect will pass away.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
For the benefit of the reader who wishes to travel further
along the trails opened up in this survey of utopias, I
am giving a list of the principal books on the subject. This
list includes all the important utopias that are accessible
in English, as well as a few that are not; but it is not
exhaustive, for the region of Utopia has its swamps and
arid places as well as its fertile and cultivated land; and
no one but a scholarly explorer need attempt to enter the
more forbidding parts of the country.
Needless to say, in dealing with our historic utopias I
had a rough criterion of selection. I set out to treat such
plans for the improvement of the human community as had
been embodied in complete pictures of an ideal commonwealth:
this excluded important essays in politics like
Hobbes’ Leviathan and Harrington’s Oceana; and it ruled
out any treatment of abstract idealisms which, however
important, did not exemplify the essential utopian method.
Next, I resolved to deal at length only with those utopias
which have exercised some influence on thought and life,
particularly in the Western European world. Third, I
sought to emphasize what was common in the methods and
ends of the classic utopias; making plain their relations
within the world of utopias and their relevance in the
present day, rather than attempting to show in any detail
the social milieu in which each utopian wrote. In dealing
with the nineteenth century my criterion became a little
shaky; and I frankly chose the nineteenth century utopias
on the basis of their association with temporal movements
like state socialism, the single tax, and syndicalism, rather
than because of their conformity to standards which served
to weed out irrelevant utopias in the earlier centuries. In
devoting a little space to Fourier and Spence and giving
short shrift to Owen I have tried to restore these interesting
and significant figures to the place that they deserve.
There will doubtless be disagreements over my selections
and the amount of space I have allotted to various writers;
but at least, where there has been madness there has also
been method.
Certain parts of the argument are not covered by this
list of utopias. The best introductions to utopian literature
in general are in German; see R. Blueher’s excellent
pamphlet on Moderne Utopien; Ein Beitrag zur
Geschichte des Sozialismus, Bonn: 1920. While Mr. Van
Wyck Brooks put me independently on the trail of Rabelais’
Abbey of Theleme I must acknowledge, with as much grace
as possible, that Herr Blueher anticipated me in grasping
this clue to Renascence culture; and if any credit is due,
he deserves it. The most exhaustive catalogue of pre-nineteenth
century utopias is contained in Kautsky’s Vorläufer
des Modernen Sozialismus. Max Beer’s History of
British Socialism has an excellent discussion of the relation
of the Utopians to socialism. See also Moritz Kaufmann’s
Utopias; or Schemes of Social Improvement, from
Sir Thomas More to Karl Marx, London: 1879. In the excellent
History of Utopian Thought, by Dr. J. O. Hertzler
(Macmillan: 1923), the phantasists are sympathetically
treated.
The chapter on the Country House might well be prefaced
by Mr. Thorstein Veblen’s Theory of the Leisure
Class, a satire which seems to me unique in scholarship
and originality. The importance of our social myths and
our collective representations has been noted by a whole
school of French sociologists who follow Émile Durkheim;
and the dynamic force of ideas has been treated by Alfred
Fouillée. On both these topics there is a whole literature;
and it would give a sense of false simplicity to single out
any particular essay. There is a fairly popular discussion
of the place of myths and ideals in the George Sorel’s Reflexions
on Violence, and Benjamin Kidd’s Science of Power
(especially Chapter V.).
As a loose illustration of the general method and outlook
embodied in this book I refer to the Making of the Future
Series, edited by Messrs. Patrick Geddes and Victor Branford
and published by Williams & Norgate, London. There
is an able exposition of the regionalist movement and of the
fundamental realities upon which this movement is based
in two books published in that series; namely, Professor
Fleure’s Human Geography in Western Europe and C. B.
Fawcett’s The Provinces of England. Two works by the
editors, The Coming Polity and Our Social Inheritance are
likewise suggestive. Professor Geddes is the outstanding
exponent of the Eutopian method both in thought and in
practical activity; and the reader should consult his City
Development (1904) and his Town-Planning towards
City Development: a Report to the Durbar of Indore, 2
vols. Indore, 1918. Both of these books are mines from
which all sorts of precious thoughts can be quarried. Remaindered
copies of the first can be obtained from John
Grant, Bookseller, Edinburgh; while the second is sold by
Botsford, High Holborn, London. Professor Geddes’
work exemplifies concretely a good part of what I have
sought to explain and define in not altogether adequate
prose.
UTOPIAS — Transcriber’s Notes
Plato (427 B.C.–347 B.C.). The Republic. Translated
with notes and essays by Benjamin Jowett. Oxford:
1894. See also Plato’s Critias and Statesman in the
same edition. The Laws, which is a more detailed
attempt to work out the details of a good polity, is so
lacking in Plato’s original inspiration that, but for
Aristotle’s allusion to it, one would promptly take it
for the work of another hand.
More, Sir Thomas (1478–1535). Utopia. Published
originally in Latin in 1516. There are numerous modern
editions. See Ideal Commonwealths, edited by
Henry Morley.
Andreæ, Johann Valentin (1586–1654). Christianopolis.
Published in 1619 and translated in 1916 by
Felix Emil Held under the title of Christianopolis: An
Ideal State of the 17th Century. Oxford University
Press. Mr. Held’s introduction contains an account
of Andreæ’s life.
Bacon, Francis (1561–1626). The New Atlantis. Published
in 1627. Bacon contemplated writing a second
part which would deal with the laws of his ideal commonwealth.
See Ideal Commonwealths.
Campanella, Tomasso (1568–1639). The City of the Sun.
Published in 1637 as Civitas Solis Poetica: Idea
Reipublicæ Philosophiæ. See Ideal Commonwealths.
Allais, Denis Vairasse d’ (—). L’Histoire des Sevarambes.
Written in 1672 and translated into English as
The History of the Sevarites, written by one Captain
Siden, London: 1675. In Kautsky’s Vorläufer des
Modernen Sozialismus this utopia is given high praise
and is ranked as the French parallel of More’s Utopia;
but I feel that this is a sad error in judgment which
perhaps arose out of the bare fact that the first law of
the great dictator Sevarias was to put all private property
in the hands of the state, to be disposed of absolutely
by its authority, and to do away with distinctions
of rank and hereditary dignity. There is little that is
fresh or imaginative in Vairasse’s treatment, however,
and there is nothing like More’s detailed effort to
guard against usurpation of power by the ruling
classes. As simple fiction, the History of the Sevarites
is, however, readable. See also L’Histoire des Galligènes,
by Tiphaigne de la Roche; likewise the excellent
satire, Giphantia. The description of Salentum,
under Mentor, in Fénélon’s Telemachus should
not be neglected. The Abbé Morelly’s Basiliade is
little more than a definition of his Code de la Nature.
Mercier, Louis Sebastien (1740–1814). Memoirs of the
Year 2500. Published in French in 1772 and translated
into English, Liverpool: 1802.
Spence, Thomas (1750–1814). Description of Spensonia.
Constitution of Spensonia. London: 1795. Privately
printed at the Courier Press; Leamington Spa: 1917.
Fourier, Charles François Marie (1772–1837). Traité
de l’Association domestique agricole. 2 vols. 1822.
Le Nouveau Monde Industriel. 2 vols. 1829. See
also Albert Brisbane in his General Introduction to
the Social Sciences (Fourier’s “Social Destinies”),
and Selections from the Works of Fourier, translated
by Julia Franklin, with an introduction by Charles
Gide, London: 1901.
Cabet, Étienne (1788–1856). Voyage en Icarie. Published
in 1845 and numerous editions followed during
the next five years; see that of the Bureau du Populaie,
Paris: 1848.
Buckingham, James Silk (1786–1855). National Evils
and Practical Remedies, with a plan for a model town.
London: 1848.
Bulwer-Lytton, E. (1803–1873). The Coming Race; or
the New Utopia. London: 185—. A fantastic romance
about a people who live underground, possess
detachable wings, and command a potency known as
“vril.” It is perhaps not altogether without significance
that this new hierarchy of industrial angels was
conceived by Lytton in the same decade that saw the
building of the Crystal Palace.
Pemberton, Robert (—). The Happy Colony. London:
1854. This is an appeal to the working class, somewhat
similar in temper and method to Buckingham’s
appeal to the middle class. Pemberton had an individual
system of psychology which he desired to apply
in education. This utopia has now only a limited historical
significance.
Bellamy, Edward (1850–1898). Looking Backward; Boston:
1888. Equality; Boston: 1897.
Hertzka, Theodor (1845–?). Freeland: A Social Anticipation.
First edition published in German, 1889;
English translation published by the British Freeland
Association in 1891. A Visit to Freeland, or the New
Paradise Regained. Translation published by the
above Association, London: 1894. The first work lays
the foundations for the utopia; the second is the ideal
commonwealth in action.
Morris, William (1834–1896). News from Nowhere.
London: 1890. There have been numerous editions.
Howard, Ebenezer (1850–?). Garden Cities of Tomorrow.
London: 1902. First published as Tomorrow in
1898. Unique among utopian books in that its eutopia
has been partly realized. See numerous descriptions
of Letchworth, the first Garden City.
Hudson, W. H. (—). A Crystal Age. London: 1906.
Thirion, Émile (1825–?). Neustria: Utopie Individualiste.
Paris: 1901. This is one of the rare, deliberately
individualistic utopias, founded on work, liberty,
and property. It assumes that a colony of Girondists
were able to establish themselves in South America.
Herzl, Theodor (1860–1904). Altneuland. Leipzig:
1903.
Tarde, Gabriel (1843–1904). Underground Man. London:
1905. A deft and well-conceived fantasy, full of
excellent criticism. Towards the past it is a utopia
of reconstruction, towards the future—but herein lies
much of its charm!—it is one of escape.
Wells, H. G. (1866–?). A Modern Utopia. New York: 1905.
Cram, Ralph Adams (1863–?). Walled Towns. Boston:
1919. Dr. Cram does not classify this work as a
utopia; but the honest critic cannot help giving it that
label. Dr. Cram sees no basis for eutopia without the
system of values and the sanctions perpetuated by the
Christian Church; since this leaves the greater part of
humanity in Darkness, I cannot agree with him. Dr.
Cram, however, is a fine scholar and a stimulating
critic; and if one could only grant his assumptions his
conclusions would be magnificent.
Morley, Henry. Ideal Commonwealths; Plutarch’s
Lycurgus, More’s Utopia, Bacon’s New Atlantis, Campanella’s
City of the Sun, and a Fragment of Hall’s
Mundus Alter et Idem, with an introduction by Henry
Morley. London: G. Routledge, 1886.
Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made
consistent when a predominant preference was found
in the original book; otherwise they were not changed.
Simple typographical errors were corrected; unbalanced
quotation marks were remedied when the change was
obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.
Chapter One did not indicate the beginning of section “5”. Transcriber
added it by referencing an earlier edition of the book.
Text mostly uses “utopia” but sometimes uses “eutopia”. Both retained here.